Omni Touch

OmniTouch
Advanced Communication Server (ACS)

Release 7.1.4
Administration Guide
8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent.
Microsoft, Microsoft Office Communicator, Microsoft Office Live Communication Server, Microsoft Windows Messenger, Active Directory, Internet Explorer,
ActiveX, Windows, Windows NT, PowerPoint, and Excel are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or
other countries.
VMware® is a registered trademark of VMware, Inc.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright © 2008 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
FCC Interference Statement
If equipment has been purchased from Alcatel-Lucent, this equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against radio interference in a commercial environment. This equipment
can generate, use and radiate radio frequency, energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions in this manual, may cause interference
with radio communications.

Contents
1 Introduction
Alcatel-Lucent’s OmniTouch Advanced Communications Server (ACS) ................................................1-1
Using this guide ...........................................................................................................................................1-3
2 System Configuration
Initiating configuration ...............................................................................................................................2-5
TCP/IP settings ...........................................................................................................................................2-5
PSTN trunk settings ...................................................................................................................................2-8
VoIP settings ..............................................................................................................................................2-12
Video settings ............................................................................................................................................2-14
Selecting RADVISION ............................................................................................................................2-16
Reserved audio ports .................................................................................................................................2-18
Server audio port limits .............................................................................................................................2-18
Overbooking and not overbooking audio ports ........................................................................................2-19
Organization audio port limits ..................................................................................................................2-20
SIP proxies (VoIP configuration) ..............................................................................................................2-30
Voice prompts ............................................................................................................................................2-33
Downloading a prompt set file ..................................................................................................................2-33
Domains ....................................................................................................................................................2-39
SSL certificates ..........................................................................................................................................2-41
User Authentication .................................................................................................................................2-44
Unified Communication ...........................................................................................................................2-48
List organizations ......................................................................................................................................2-49
Branding ....................................................................................................................................................2-52
Translation tables ......................................................................................................................................2-58
Access codes .............................................................................................................................................2-62
Music on Hold settings .............................................................................................................................2-63
Licensing ...................................................................................................................................................2-64
Automatic server backup ..........................................................................................................................2-69
Using a dedicated NIC card for backups ..................................................................................................2-71
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 iii
November 20, 2008

Contents
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Remote sites .............................................................................................................................................. 2-72

Stacking .................................................................................................................................................... 2-75
Data replication ........................................................................................................................................ 2-81
Disassembling an OmniTouch ACS stack ................................................................................................ 2-86
Advanced settings ..................................................................................................................................... 2-87
Phone formatting rules ............................................................................................................................. 2-88
Phone number display filter ...................................................................................................................... 2-89
Edit DAS rules .......................................................................................................................................... 2-91
Sample DAS rules ..................................................................................................................................... 2-93
Configure SNMP ...................................................................................................................................... 2-95
Configure alarm server .............................................................................................................................. 2-98
Configure collaboration subnet ................................................................................................................ 2-99
Configure sendmail ................................................................................................................................. 2-100
Configure bonding .................................................................................................................................. 2-101
Configure IM archiving .......................................................................................................................... 2-102
Construct Document Conversion VM ................................................................................................... 2-103
Route management ................................................................................................................................. 2-110
Removing static routes ........................................................................................................................... 2-111
Edit TPDAS rules ................................................................................................................................... 2-111
Sample TPDAS Rules ............................................................................................................................. 2-112
AMDS (Automated Message Delivery System) settings ........................................................................ 2-112
Connector settings .................................................................................................................................. 2-114
3 Management Actions
Manual server backup ................................................................................................................................. 3-2
Manual server restore ................................................................................................................................. 3-4
Restoring an Alliance server ....................................................................................................................... 3-5
Restoring after replacement of the Primary server ..................................................................................... 3-8
Restoring a standalone server ................................................................................................................... 3-21
Advanced upgrade options ....................................................................................................................... 3-27
Restart servers (restart OmniTouch ACS processes) ............................................................................... 3-28
4 Provisioning and Account Management

Organizations .............................................................................................................................................. 4-3
Provisioning organizations .......................................................................................................................... 4-4
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
iv 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Contents
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Assigning text translations ........................................................................................................................4-10

Editing phones ..........................................................................................................................................4-11
Default user settings for organizations ......................................................................................................4-13
Default user preferences for organizations ................................................................................................4-17
Manage user settings .................................................................................................................................4-28
Manage user preferences ...........................................................................................................................4-34
IP audio/video preferences ........................................................................................................................4-38
View scheduled conferences .....................................................................................................................4-39
View Call Detail Report ............................................................................................................................4-42
Schedule a reservationless conference ......................................................................................................4-47
Manage delegates ......................................................................................................................................4-48
Password policy .........................................................................................................................................4-49
Call blocking .............................................................................................................................................4-50
Bulk provision/modify user accounts ........................................................................................................4-54
Parameter action formats ..........................................................................................................................4-56
Supported bulk provision parameters .......................................................................................................4-57
Possible bulk provisioning messages ..........................................................................................................4-63
Bulk provision reservationless conferences ..............................................................................................4-67
Export user data ........................................................................................................................................4-68
Import user data ........................................................................................................................................4-69
Delete user data ........................................................................................................................................4-71
Download reservationless conferences .....................................................................................................4-72
Add Administrator user ............................................................................................................................4-73
List Administrators ...................................................................................................................................4-74
Change Administrator password ...............................................................................................................4-75
Find a user in a stack ................................................................................................................................4-76
5 Monitoring
Monitoring administration ..........................................................................................................................5-2
Viewing active calls .....................................................................................................................................5-3
Viewing active media ..................................................................................................................................5-4
Viewing active users ....................................................................................................................................5-8
Send alerts to active users ...........................................................................................................................5-9
System status ...............................................................................................................................................5-9
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 v
November 20, 2008

Contents
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
System information ................................................................................................................................... 5-11

Trunk status .............................................................................................................................................. 5-13
Site connections ........................................................................................................................................ 5-13
Viewing data replication ........................................................................................................................... 5-15
Server status .............................................................................................................................................. 5-17
System commands ..................................................................................................................................... 5-19
SIP logs ...................................................................................................................................................... 5-20
Viewing PSTN logs ................................................................................................................................... 5-21
6 Server Reporting
Managing the system .................................................................................................................................. 6-2
Call Detail Reports ..................................................................................................................................... 6-2
Trunk utilization statistics ........................................................................................................................... 6-4
VoIP utilization statistics ............................................................................................................................. 6-6
Scheduled conferences ............................................................................................................................... 6-7
System alerts log ......................................................................................................................................... 6-9
Install history log ....................................................................................................................................... 6-10
Disk usage ................................................................................................................................................. 6-12
A Error Codes and Alarm Conditions

B Server Alarms and Alerts
C Voice Prompts
D NTP Servers
NTP Servers: US ....................................................................................................................................... D-1
E Serial Console Interface: Administrative Functions

Serial console menu ....................................................................................................................................E-2
Change password ........................................................................................................................................E-3
Reset certificate/key pair .............................................................................................................................E-3
Revert server software ................................................................................................................................E-3
Restore configuration ..................................................................................................................................E-3
Reset web administrator password ..............................................................................................................E-4
Restart server ..............................................................................................................................................E-4
Shutdown server .........................................................................................................................................E-4
End configuration session ...........................................................................................................................E-4
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
vi 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Contents
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
F Cookie Domains
Cookie basics ...............................................................................................................................................F-1
Cookie administration for ACS ..................................................................................................................F-2
Cookie mis-configuration ...........................................................................................................................F-3
G IM Archiving
IM archiving features and operating parameters ....................................................................................... G-1
The SMTP message structure .................................................................................................................... G-2
Field definitions .......................................................................................................................................... G-4
H SNMP Traps
SNMP traps ................................................................................................................................................H-1
SNMP v2 ....................................................................................................................................................H-1
SNMP v3 ....................................................................................................................................................H-2
MIB ............................................................................................................................................................H-3
I Application Sharing Proxy Issues

Proxy traversal solutions ..............................................................................................................................I-2
Authentication .............................................................................................................................................I-2
Logging .........................................................................................................................................................I-2
Uninstall .......................................................................................................................................................I-3
IN Index
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 vii
November 20, 2008

Contents
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
viii 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

List of figures
1 Introduction
1-1 Applications on the OmniTouch ACS Platform ...........................................................................1-2
2-1 Alcatel-Lucent Welcome Screen (Configuration Options) ..........................................................2-5
2-2 TCP/IP Settings Page with Eth0 and Eth01 Interfaces .................................................................2-6
2-3 TCP/IP Settings with More Than Two Ethernet Interfaces ..........................................................2-6
2-4 Telephone Network Settings PSTN Network ..............................................................................2-9
2-5 Telephone Network Settings Internal Oscillator .........................................................................2-10
2-6 VoIP Settings ................................................................................................................................2-12
2-7 General Video Settings ................................................................................................................2-15
2-8 Typical Settings for Radvision MCU Integration with ACS .......................................................2-17
2-9 System Options ............................................................................................................................2-21
2-10 Not Enough Slots Available ........................................................................................................2-28
2-11 Port Calendar ...............................................................................................................................2-28
2-12 SIP (UDP) Proxies Form ..............................................................................................................2-30
2-13 Outbound OXE 9.0 Spatial Redundancy Mode ..........................................................................2-31
2-14 Prompt Set Management .............................................................................................................2-34
2-15 File Download Dialog Box ...........................................................................................................2-35
2-16 Voice Prompt Files .......................................................................................................................2-35
2-17 Adding a Prompt Set ...................................................................................................................2-36
2-18 Edit Prompt Set ...........................................................................................................................2-37
2-19 Create New Domain ....................................................................................................................2-39
2-20 Edit Domain .................................................................................................................................2-40
2-21 Install SSL Certificates ................................................................................................................2-42
2-22 Request SSL Certificate ...............................................................................................................2-43
2-23 Domain User Authentication ......................................................................................................2-44
2-24 LDAP Configuration Options .....................................................................................................2-46
2-25 External Authentication ..............................................................................................................2-48
2-26 List Organizations ........................................................................................................................2-50
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 ix
November 20, 2008

List of figures
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-27 List Organizations Links .............................................................................................................. 2-51

2-28 Branding Management ................................................................................................................ 2-53
2-29 Branding File Download .............................................................................................................. 2-53
2-30 Branding File ................................................................................................................................ 2-57
2-31 Translation Sets ........................................................................................................................... 2-59
2-32 Language Files ............................................................................................................................. 2-61
2-33 Access Code Generation ............................................................................................................. 2-62
2-34 Music on Hold Update Screen .................................................................................................... 2-64
2-35 Licensing Page ............................................................................................................................. 2-65
2-36 Nightly Backup Settings .............................................................................................................. 2-70
2-37 Backup Settings Verification ....................................................................................................... 2-71
2-38 Add or Edit a Remote Site .......................................................................................................... 2-73
2-39 Remote Site List .......................................................................................................................... 2-74
2-40 Stack Parameters – Dynamic ....................................................................................................... 2-78
2-41 Stack Parameters – Static ............................................................................................................ 2-79
2-42 Servers in a Stack ........................................................................................................................ 2-80
2-43 Data Replication – Primary ......................................................................................................... 2-82
2-44 Data Replication – Secondary ..................................................................................................... 2-83
2-45 Clear Database ............................................................................................................................. 2-84
2-46 Replicate ...................................................................................................................................... 2-85
2-47 Monitoring Data Replication ...................................................................................................... 2-85
2-48 Phone Formatting Rules .............................................................................................................. 2-88
2-49 Phone Number Display Filter ..................................................................................................... 2-90
2-50 DAS Rules ................................................................................................................................... 2-92
2-51 Explorer Warning ......................................................................................................................... 2-93
2-52 SNMP Settings ........................................................................................................................... 2-95
2-53 Configure Alarm Server .............................................................................................................. 2-98
2-54 Subnet Setting ........................................................................................................................... 2-100
2-55 Sendmail ................................................................................................................................... 2-101
2-56 Use Bonding .............................................................................................................................. 2-101
2-57 IM Archiving ............................................................................................................................. 2-102
2-58 Document Conversion VM ....................................................................................................... 2-105
2-59 Location of startup.bat File ....................................................................................................... 2-108
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
x 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

List of figures
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-60 Route Management ...................................................................................................................2-110

2-61 Remove All Static Routes .........................................................................................................2-111
2-62 TPDAS Rules .............................................................................................................................2-112
2-63 Automated Message Delivery ....................................................................................................2-113
2-64 ECS Items ..................................................................................................................................2-115
2-65 Add ECS Service/Agent ............................................................................................................2-115
2-66 List ECS Services and Agents ...................................................................................................2-116
2-67 Modify ECS Host IP Address ....................................................................................................2-117
3-1 Manual Server Backup ..................................................................................................................3-3
3-2 Manual Server Restore ..................................................................................................................3-5
3-3 Manage Ethernet Interface Name .................................................................................................3-6
3-4 Ethernet Name Swap .....................................................................................................................3-6
3-5 Restart Server ................................................................................................................................3-7
3-6 Restart Alcatel-Lucent Server .......................................................................................................3-7
3-7 Upload License on Primary ..........................................................................................................3-10
3-8 Check Primary Server Configuration ..........................................................................................3-13
3-9 Upload License on Secondary .....................................................................................................3-16
3-10 Serial Console ..............................................................................................................................3-17
3-11 Use DHCP ...................................................................................................................................3-17
3-12 Check Secondary Server Configuration ......................................................................................3-20
3-13 Serial Console ..............................................................................................................................3-22
3-14 Use DHCP ...................................................................................................................................3-23
3-15 Serial Console ..............................................................................................................................3-24
3-16 Use DHCP ...................................................................................................................................3-24
3-17 Shut Down System ......................................................................................................................3-26
3-18 Upgrade Server Software .............................................................................................................3-27
3-19 Upgrade Software Using CD or DVD .........................................................................................3-28
3-20 Restart Servers .............................................................................................................................3-29

4-1 Provisioning Screen .......................................................................................................................4-3
4-2 Create New Organization ..............................................................................................................4-5
4-3 Organization List Screen ...............................................................................................................4-5
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 xi
November 20, 2008

List of figures
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-4 Edit Organization Screen .............................................................................................................. 4-6

4-5 Edit Phones .................................................................................................................................. 4-11
4-6 Default User Settings for Organzation ........................................................................................ 4-13
4-7 Default User Preferences for Organization ................................................................................. 4-17
4-8 Adding User ................................................................................................................................. 4-21
4-9 New User Confirmation .............................................................................................................. 4-22
4-10 Adding an Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch Land Mobile Radio Conferencing and Collaboration
(LMRCC) User ......................................................................................................................................... 4-22
4-11 Manage LMRCC User Settings ................................................................................................... 4-23
4-12 LMRCC Contact ......................................................................................................................... 4-24
4-13 Click-to-Call LMRCC User ......................................................................................................... 4-25
4-14 User List ....................................................................................................................................... 4-26
4-15 View Options ............................................................................................................................... 4-27
4-16 Manage User Settings .................................................................................................................. 4-28
4-17 Manage Phone Numbers ............................................................................................................. 4-30
4-18 User Preferences .......................................................................................................................... 4-34
4-19 View Scheduled Conferences ...................................................................................................... 4-40
4-20 Scheduled Conference Report Fields .......................................................................................... 4-41
4-21 Scheduled Recordings Report Fields ........................................................................................... 4-42
4-22 View Call Detail Report .............................................................................................................. 4-43
4-23 Scheduling a User’s Reservationless Conference ........................................................................ 4-47
4-24 Assigning a Delegate ................................................................................................................... 4-48
4-25 Password Policy ............................................................................................................................ 4-49
4-26 Add or Edit a Call Blocking Rule ................................................................................................ 4-52
4-27 Call Blocking Rules List ............................................................................................................... 4-53
4-28 Test a Call Blocking Rule ............................................................................................................. 4-53
4-29 Bulk Provision Users .................................................................................................................... 4-54
4-30 Bulk Provisioning Reservationless Conferences .......................................................................... 4-68
4-31 Export User’s Provisioning Data ................................................................................................. 4-68
4-32 Import Users ................................................................................................................................ 4-69
4-33 Delete Users ................................................................................................................................. 4-71
4-34 Downloading Reservationless Conferences ................................................................................. 4-72
4-35 Adding a System Administrator .................................................................................................. 4-73
4-36 List of System Administrators ..................................................................................................... 4-74
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xii 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

List of figures
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-37 Changing an Administrator’s Password .......................................................................................4-75

4-38 Find User ......................................................................................................................................4-76
4-39 User Name ...................................................................................................................................4-76
5 Monitoring
5-1 Monitoring .....................................................................................................................................5-2
5-2 Viewing Active Calls ......................................................................................................................5-3
5-3 Active Media .................................................................................................................................5-5
5-4 Quiesce Media Server Warning Dialog Box ..................................................................................5-5
5-5 Collect Call Quality Data ..............................................................................................................5-6
5-6 Call Quality Data File Download ..................................................................................................5-7
5-7 Active Users ...................................................................................................................................5-8
5-8 Send Alerts ....................................................................................................................................5-9
5-9 Viewing System Status .................................................................................................................5-10
5-10 System Information ......................................................................................................................5-12
5-11 Viewing Trunk Status ...................................................................................................................5-13
5-12 Connected Sites ...........................................................................................................................5-14
5-13 Data Replication Status ...............................................................................................................5-16
5-14 Server Process Status ...................................................................................................................5-18
5-15 System Commands Information ..................................................................................................5-19
5-16 SIP Log .........................................................................................................................................5-20
5-17 View PSTN Log ...........................................................................................................................5-21
6 Server Reporting
6-1 Server Reporting Screen ................................................................................................................6-2
6-2 View Call Details ...........................................................................................................................6-3
6-3 Call Detail Report ..........................................................................................................................6-4
6-4 View Trunk Utilization Statistics ...................................................................................................6-4
6-5 Trunk Utilization Histogram ..........................................................................................................6-5
6-6 View VoIP Utilization ....................................................................................................................6-6
6-7 VoIP Utilization Chart ...................................................................................................................6-7
6-8 View Scheduled Conferences ........................................................................................................6-7
6-9 Scheduled Conference Report .......................................................................................................6-8
6-10 System Alerts Selection ...............................................................................................................6-10
6-11 System Alerts Results ..................................................................................................................6-10
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 xiii
November 20, 2008

List of figures
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-12 Install History Selection .............................................................................................................. 6-11

6-13 Install History Results .................................................................................................................. 6-11
6-14 Disk Usage ................................................................................................................................... 6-12
6-15 Disk Usage by Organization ........................................................................................................ 6-13
E Serial Console Interface: Administrative Functions

E-1 Serial Console Menu .....................................................................................................................E-2
E-2 Change Password ...........................................................................................................................E-3
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xiv 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

List of tables
2-1 TCP/IP Settings .............................................................................................................................2-7
2-2 VoIP Settings ................................................................................................................................2-13
2-3 Using Various codecs ...................................................................................................................2-13
2-4 Video Settings ..............................................................................................................................2-16
2-5 Fields: System Options ................................................................................................................2-22
2-6 Field: Media Port Management ...................................................................................................2-26
2-7 Default Outbound SIP Proxy Fields ............................................................................................2-31
2-8 Domain Fields ..............................................................................................................................2-40
2-9 LDAP Server Information ...........................................................................................................2-47
2-10 Unified Communications Server Information .............................................................................2-49
2-11 Branding Data Types ....................................................................................................................2-52
2-12 Access Code Format Examples ....................................................................................................2-63
2-13 Counted Licenses .........................................................................................................................2-66
2-14 Licensed Features .........................................................................................................................2-67
2-15 Stacking Methods ........................................................................................................................2-76
2-16 Data Replication State Definitions ..............................................................................................2-85
2-17 Phone Formatting Rules Fields ....................................................................................................2-89
2-18 Sample DAS Rules .......................................................................................................................2-93
2-19 Routing Table Information ........................................................................................................2-110
2-20 Sample TPDAS Rules ................................................................................................................2-112
2-21 AMDS Settings ..........................................................................................................................2-113
2-22 ECS Service/Agent Settings ......................................................................................................2-116
3-1 Server Processes ...........................................................................................................................3-29
4-1 Organization Settings ....................................................................................................................4-7
4-2 Text Translation Settings .............................................................................................................4-10
4-3 Phone Settings: Organization ...........................................................................................4-11
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 xv
November 20, 2008

List of tables
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-4 Default User Settings ................................................................................................................... 4-14

4-5 Default User PreferencesCreating/Adding User Accounts ......................................................... 4-18
4-6 User Settings ................................................................................................................................ 4-29
4-7 User Preferences .......................................................................................................................... 4-35
4-8 Connecting to Another User ....................................................................................................... 4-38
4-9 Scheduled Conference Report .................................................................................................... 4-41
4-10 Scheduled Recordings Report ..................................................................................................... 4-42
4-11 Call Detail Report Fields ............................................................................................................. 4-43
4-12 Sample Rules With Blocking Results .......................................................................................... 4-51
4-13 Parameter Descriptions ................................................................................................................ 4-57
5 Monitoring
5-1 System Information ..................................................................................................................... 5-11
5-2 Site Connections Fields ............................................................................................................... 5-14
5-3 Data Replication States ............................................................................................................... 5-17
5-4 Server Process Status Indicators .................................................................................................. 5-18
6 Server Reporting
6-1 Scheduled Conference Report Fields ................................................................................ 6-8
6-2 Disk Usage ................................................................................................................................... 6-12
B Server Alarms and Alerts
B-1 Alerts/Alarms Corrective Maintenance Procedures .....................................................................B-2
C Voice Prompts
C-1 Voice Prompt List ......................................................................................................................... C-1
D NTP Servers
D-1 NTP Servers: US .......................................................................................................................... D-1
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xvi 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

1 Introduction
Overview
Purpose
This chapter introduces Alcatel-Lucent’s OmniTouch Advanced Communications
Server (ACS).
Contents
This chapter covers these topics.
Alcatel-Lucent’s OmniTouch Advanced Communications Server (ACS) 1-1
Using this guide 1-3
Alcatel-Lucent’s OmniTouch Advanced Communications

Server (ACS)
Alcatel-Lucent’s OmniTouch Advanced Communications Server (ACS) is a flexible and
secure software platform for telephony and collaboration. It incorporates media server
capabilities for both VoIP (Voice over IP) and PSTN (T1, PRI, or E1) interfaces. In
addition, OmniTouch ACS is an application server for Alcatel-Lucent’s core applications,
providing VoIP and PSTN telephony as well as Instant Messaging (IM) and Presence on a
SIP-based platform. Alcatel-Lucent’s applications built on OmniTouch ACS include:
• Alcatel-Lucent A8628 Multimedia Instant Conferencing Solution (MMIC)
• Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch My Teamwork Enterprise Edition
• Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch Land Mobile Radio Conferencing and Collaboration
• Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch My Teamwork Office Edition
• Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch My Teamwork for Microsoft Office Communicator 2005
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 1-1
November 20, 2008

Introduction Alcatel-Lucent’s OmniTouch Advanced Communications
Server (ACS)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch My Teamwork for IBM® Lotus® Sametime®

• Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch My Teamwork for Windows Mobile 6
• Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch Automated Message Delivery System (AMDS)
These applications all use Alcatel-Lucent’s zero-footprint browser User Interfaces, which
are compatible with a wide variety of browsers. Thus, they may be deployed without
requiring any software installation on client machines. The applications, as well as Alcatel-
Lucent’s administrative software, can also be re-branded for OEM distribution.
Figure 1-1 Applications on the OmniTouch ACS Platform
In addition, OmniTouch ACS applications are extensible. Alcatel-Lucent exposes the

same telephony and collaboration interfaces used to implement the applications to
partners through XML and HTML URLs. You can also communicate directly with
Alcatel-Lucent’s OmniTouch ACS using the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP), which is
OmniTouch ACS’s native call/session control protocol. Thus, Alcatel-Lucent partners
can provide their own customers (enterprises and service providers) with powerful,
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-2 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Introduction Using this guide
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
customized and branded zero-footprint conferencing, telephony, and collaboration

applications. Alcatel-Lucent partners have used OmniTouch ACS’s flexible APIs to
develop converged application suites for PBXs, to add telephony/IM into portals, and to
deliver specialized conferencing solutions.
Note: OmniTouch ACS ships as a sealed appliance. You cannot install third-party
software or use the command-line interface.
For more detail on Alcatel-Lucent’s product offerings, see Alcatel-Lucent’s website
www.Alcatel-Lucent.com.
Using this guide

The target audience for this guide is system administrators. It assumes some familiarity
with basic networking and telephony concepts and terms.
This Administration Guide provides a comprehensive reference for OmniTouch ACS
administration. It incorporates the entire set of operations, administration, maintenance,
and provisioning (OAM&P) capabilities for all functionality offered by Alcatel-Lucent.
Configuration options for functionality that you have not purchased are missing when you
use the Administration application.
This manual and the Administration application are comprehensive for all modes of
OmniTouch ACS media serving. Your installation may currently possess only PSTN
trunks, in which case, VoIP connectivity may be configured, but need not be.
This manual also accommodates the different needs of Alcatel-Lucent OEM partners and
Alcatel-Lucent direct customers, in particular, with installation.
If ordered directly from Alcatel-Lucent, OmniTouch ACS is delivered as an appliance,
with software and licenses pre-installed on Intel-based rack-mountable servers. (From a
network architecture point of view, Alcatel-Lucent servers may be deployed behind a
firewall along with the rest of an enterprise’s web services.) Applications purchased by the
customer will be enabled; others will be disabled.
Alternatively, OEM partners who are looking to market large quantities of Alcatel-Lucent
product may want to ship Alcatel-Lucent Communications servers on hardware platforms
of their choice, particularly for VoIP-only product offerings. These partners perform
Alcatel-Lucent software and license installation themselves. Partners offer specific
configurations of applications and branding; Alcatel-Lucent supports this with a certain
degree of programmatic pre-configuration and branding. Customization beyond that
offered by Alcatel-Lucent’s branding tools must be arranged within the context of the
partner’s business relationship.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 1-3
November 20, 2008

Introduction Using this guide
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This Guide offers no guidance on managing the OmniTouch ACS’s operating

environment – for example, upgrading the Operating System. The OmniTouch ACS
software (Linux, server software, and applications) is a fully integrated system. Although
the system resides on off-the-shelf hardware, once the OmniTouch ACS software is
installed, the system is dedicated to OmniTouch ACS. You cannot install other
applications as co-resident servers. OmniTouch ACS provides its own management
facilities such as backup/restore and SNMP alerts. To maintain the integrity of the system
and its telephony performance, customer access to the OmniTouch ACS underlying
operating environment is not allowed.
This document is a reference guide to the functions provided in Alcatel-Lucent’s extensive
System Administration application, with supporting material in Appendices.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-4 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the Configuration menu items with the exception of those that
result in immediate administrator commands to the server. (see Chapter 3, “Management
Actions”)
Contents
This chapter covers these topics and procedures.
Topics:
Initiating configuration 2-5
TCP/IP settings 2-5
PSTN trunk settings 2-8
VoIP settings 2-12
Video settings 2-14
Selecting RADVISION 2-16

Reserved audio ports 2-18
Server audio port limits 2-18
Overbooking and not overbooking audio ports 2-19
Organization audio port limits 2-20
SIP proxies (VoIP configuration) 2-30
Voice prompts 2-33
Downloading a prompt set file 2-33
Domains 2-39
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-1
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SSL certificates 2-41

User Authentication 2-44
Unified Communication 2-48
List organizations 2-49
Branding 2-52
Access codes 2-62
Music on Hold settings 2-63
Licensing 2-64
Automatic server backup 2-69
Remote sites 2-72
Stacking 2-75
Data replication 2-81
Disassembling an OmniTouch ACS stack 2-86
Advanced settings 2-87
Phone formatting rules 2-88
Phone number display filter 2-89
Edit DAS rules 2-91
Sample DAS rules 2-93
Configure SNMP 2-95
Configure alarm server 2-98
Configure collaboration subnet 2-99
Configure sendmail 2-100
Configure bonding 2-101
Configure IM archiving 2-102
Construct Document Conversion VM 2-103
Route management 2-110
Removing static routes 2-111
Edit TPDAS rules 2-111
Sample TPDAS Rules 2-112
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-2 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AMDS (Automated Message Delivery System) settings 2-112

Connector settings 2-114
Procedures:
To configure the TCP/IP information for OmniTouch ACS 2-7
To configure PSTN trunk settings 2-8
To configure video settings 2-14
To block the Radvision IVR from announcing you are in a conference 2-17
To configure system options 2-21
To set system options and media port management 2-29
To set date, time and time zone 2-29
To download a prompt set 2-34
To update or change the voice prompts 2-36
To edit the prompt set 2-37
To create a new Domain 2-39
To edit Domain settings 2-40
To install an SSL certificate 2-41
To add a new trusted certificate authority 2-43
To configure LDAP 2-45
To configure Unified Communication Authentication 2-48
To view a list of organizations 2-49
To edit a branding file 2-53
To add a branding file 2-57
To add a translation set file 2-59
To edit a translation set file 2-60
To set the range of access codes 2-62
To install a new license certificate 2-68
To upload the VMware license 2-68
To enable automatic server backup 2-69
To add remote sites 2-73
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-3
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To see a list of remote servers 2-74

To modify the settings for an existing remote server 2-74
To delete which servers are federated 2-75
To configure each server in a stack 2-77
To configure a server to be a Primary 2-82
To configure a server to be a Secondary 2-83
To clear the Secondary server’s database in preparation for synchronization 2-84
To initiate synchronization between the Primary and Secondary servers’ 2-84
databases
To define extension numbers 2-88
To configure the way phone numbers are displayed 2-90
To configure DAS rules 2-92
To configure the server to generate SNMP traps 2-95
To enable OmniTouch ACS alerts to be sent to the UC alarm and alert server 2-98
To change the IP range 2-99
To disable sendmail 2-100
To enable IM archiving 2-102
To construct document conversion VM 2-104
To configure the settings of the Automated Message Delivery System 2-113
To access ECS settings 2-114
To access the list of all ECS Services and Agents 2-116
To modify the ECS Host IP address 2-117
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-4 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Initiating configuration
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Initiating configuration
To begin configuring OmniTouch ACS, access the Administration application using the
URL,
for example, ht tp s :/ /y o ur s er ve r 1. yo u rc o mp an y .c om / ad m in /
You will see a login screen. After you log in, a welcome screen appears. (Figure 2-1,
“Alcatel-Lucent Welcome Screen (Configuration Options)” (p. 2-5)) If the system you
access is part of a stack, you will see a menu in the center of the screen allowing you to
select which server you want to manage. If the system is not part of a stack, this area will
be blank, and you should select one of the menu items at the top of the screen.
Select Configuration on the top menu bar. The System Configuration choices appear in a
menu on the left.
Figure 2-1 Alcatel-Lucent Welcome Screen (Configuration Options)
The configuration menu choices are documented in this section in the order in which they
appear in the menu, except for those choices that result in immediate administrator
commands to the server. These actions are documented in Chapter 3, “Management
Actions”. For more details on Alcatel-Lucent’s product offerings, see Alcatel-Lucent’s
website at www.Alcatel-Lucent.com.
TCP/IP settings
This page allows the System Administrator to add or change the TCP/IP settings. You can
change IP address settings at any time by entering the new TCP/IP settings and clicking
the Save button. The new configuration automatically overwrites the original
configuration information, and takes effect the next time the server is restarted. Ensure
that the new settings are correct – incorrect IP settings can result in the server being
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-5
November 20, 2008

System Configuration TCP/IP settings
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
inaccessible to browsers. Should that happen, you must use the console (accessible
through the server’s video/keyboard or serial port) to set a valid IP address, (refer to the
Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch Unified Communication My Teamwork Installation Guide).
You must restart the system as soon as possible when making changes to the IP
configuration. The use of DHCP is only for specialized situations – generally the server
should be set up with a static IP address. Contact your support representative if you want
to use this feature.
Figure 2-2 TCP/IP Settings Page with Eth0 and Eth01 Interfaces
Figure 2-3 TCP/IP Settings with More Than Two Ethernet Interfaces
You should maintain a record of TCP/IP information and keep it for backup purposes.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-6 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To configure the TCP/IP information for OmniTouch ACS
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To configure the TCP/IP information for OmniTouch ACS

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click the Configuration tab.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the TCP/IP Settings item.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Verify or provide the correct settings on the TCP/IP Settings page.
Note: All of the following values should be the same as those set during installation
– refer to the Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch My Teamwork Unified Conferencing and
Collaboration Application Installation Guide.
Table 2-1 TCP/IP Settings
IP Address The address assigned during installation. IP

address settings may be changed at any time by
entering the new TCP/IP settings and clicking
the Save button.
Netmask Mask used to divide the IP address into
subnets.
Default Gateway The Gateway assigned during installation.
Web Server Name This is the URL users will enter to access the
server from their browsers. (It is typically the
hostname.domain name.)
Hostname This is the valid hostname (for example,
yourserver1) that was assigned during
installation.
Domain Name This is the valid domain name with extension
(for example, yourcompany.com) that was
assigned during installation.
Primary/Secondary NTP Server A Network Time Protocol (NTP) server is
required for successful operation of your
Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch Advanced
Communications server.
Primary/Secondary Name Server The Name server (DNS) assigned during
installation.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-7
November 20, 2008

System Configuration PSTN trunk settings
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Ensure that your Domain Name contains valid characters. An invalid
character is an underscore (_). Refer to the following Microsoft® technote found at
http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;EN-US;Q275033
“Cookies Are Not Saved If the Host Name Is Invalid.”
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If you have more than 2 interfaces (up to eth09), provide the IP Address and Netmask for
each additional interface in the grid that appears. Indicate if the interface will route
information using SIP or RTP.
Note: You must reassign routing (SIP or RTP) to another interface before removing
a NIC card that is currently being used to route information.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click the Save button.

END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
PSTN trunk settings

You can configure the T1 or E1 trunks attached to your server.
Note: If your server is VoIP only, and does not use PSTN trunks for voice traffic,
this menu choice will not be shown.
To configure PSTN trunk settings

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the Configuration tab.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the PSTN Trunk Settings item.

The telephone Global Parameters page appears.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-8 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To configure PSTN trunk settings
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-4 Telephone Network Settings PSTN Network
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-9
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-5 Telephone Network Settings Internal Oscillator
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Complete the Global Parameters.
Note: Leave PCM Companding on the µ-law setting; call your support
representative if you require A-law.
The Clock Source selection determines whether the server’s internal trunk interface
clock or the external trunk’s clock is used for trunk timing.
• If timing is to be provided by the external trunk (typical), then select PSTN
Network.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-10 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• If OmniTouch ACS is expected to provide clock on the trunks, then select

Internal Oscillator.
If the Clock Source is PSTN Network, then the Reference Trunk for Timing value
controls which trunk supplies the timing clock for all Trunks connected to the server.
If the Clock Source is Internal Oscillator, then the Reference Trunk for Timing has
no effect.
The Load Sharing Strategy sets the algorithm for how outbound DS0’s are selected
by the server.
Sequential uses the first available port, filling the first trunk, then filling the second
trunk, and so on. This strategy will use the fewest trunks possible for a call load. This is
the recommended setting for stacked configurations, because it is more efficient to
have an entire conference on a single server.
Round Robin distributes outbound call legs, first to one trunk, then to the next trunk,
then to the third trunk, and so on. Using the Round Robin strategy distributes legs
evenly across all server trunks.
Note: Destination Number Plan, Destination Number Type, and Source Number
Type can be left as Unknown. If further assistance with these fields is required,
contact your support representative.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Fill in the Line Buildout Loss information, Framing, Circuit Type, and Line Coding for
each interface.
The settings you select must be compatible with the settings of the T1/E1 trunk(s) to
which you are connecting the Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch Advanced
Communications Server (ACS). Contact your T1 service provider or PBX vendor if
you do not know these settings. See the Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch My Teamwork
Unified Conferencing and Collaboration Application Site Preparation Guide for a
complete list of available setting values.
The Number of Channels controls the number of DS0s that are available for voice
traffic. The Number of Outbound Channels controls the number of channels
available for outside dialing. For T1/CCS, this is 23 (maximum 184 ports per server).
For T1/CAS trunks, this is 24 (maximum 192 ports per server). For PRI or E1 trunks,
this is 30 (maximum 240 ports per server).
Network Termination specifies whether this trunk is set up for UNI (user-side) or
NNI (network side) interfaces.
The Audiocodes Board Serial Number (TDM Network Interface Module) field
cannot be edited. It displays the serial number of the board that is located on the
server.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click the Save button when finished.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-11
November 20, 2008

System Configuration VoIP settings
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: These changes take effect immediately.

The PSTN sub-system will restart.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
VoIP settings
You can configure various SIP and RTP settings associated with the voice interface to IP
end points in this screen.
Figure 2-6 VoIP Settings
You can control the audio codec negotiation between the server and SIP end points using
selected codecs in the Payload Preference Order drop-down lists. Your selections show the
MCU’s preferred codecs, in decreasing order of preference. The number of selections is
equal to the number of supported codecs. For example, if the server supports G711 mu-
law, G711 A-law, G726-32 (ADPCM at 32 kBps) and G729 (which requires a separate
license), then four entries will be visible. Each value can be modified by selecting a
different codec from the drop-down lists. Each CODEC can only be selected once.
Selecting NONE allows exclusion of a particular codec. The G711 mu-law codec must be
one of the selections because it will be used if the preferred codec is unavailable for use.
Note: If you are accessing OmniTouch My Teamwork audio and video conferencing
features through the Microsoft Office Communicator® interface, you must select G711
as the preferred codec.
Conferencing through Microsoft Office Communicator is not available in My
Teamwork Office Edition.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-12 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration VoIP settings
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-2 VoIP Settings
G.726-32 Payload Type You can select the dynamic payload that the
server must use for the G.726-32 codec. Valid
values are 2 and 102 to 127.
RFC2833 Payload Type You can select the dynamic payload that the
server must use for telephone-events (DTMF
digits). Valid values are 96 to 101.
TOS (Type of Service) Flags You can modify the 8-bit TOS field (also
known as the DIFF-SERV field) in the IP
header of the RTP audio packets that are
generated by the server. The value must be
hexadecimal.
G729 40ms Output Packet Size Select this, if your output packet size
requirement is 40ms rather than the 20ms
associated with the G729 in the Payload
Preference Order drop-down lists.
Note: When configuring the number of legs, always use strictly G.711 as
your guide. Using various codecs (mixed) can yield a lower number
of legs. Table 2-3, “Using Various codecs” (p. 2-13) indicates the ratio in a five-person
conference consisting of phone calls only. The testing that yielded these results was
performed on a HP DL380 with dual 3.6 GHz processors and a 1 Gb/s front plane. The
limits will vary depending on the server type, configuration, and concurrent user
activity.
Table 2-3 Using Various codecs
G.711 600 legs

G.729 300 legs
Mixed:One G.711 200 legs
Four G.729
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-13
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Video settings
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Video settings
If you are licensed for the Video feature, you can configure video conferencing on the
General Video MCU Settings page. You can use any SIP video client installed on your
PC, provided the client is supported by the Radvision Scopia video multipoint control unit
(MCU). An example of a third-party client is the Counterpath Eyebeam (SIP client).
Notes:
• Peer-to-peer (P2P) calls require a SIP client.
• The Polycom MGC MCU is not supported for new sales of My Teamwork
beginning with release 5.0. With release 5.0 or greater, only the Radvision Scopia is
supported.
• Voice-activated video switching is not supported by OmniTouch
My Teamwork at this time.
• A single OmniTouch ACS 7.1.4 media server can only communicate with a single
Video MCU. However, multiple media servers in a stacked configuration can each
have their own MCU. If you have multiple Video MCUs and you want
OmniTouch ACS to communicate with them, they must be configured to appear
as a single (virtual) Video MCU. Contact your video equipment vendor for
feasibility and/or specifications for configuring multiple Video MCUs as one.
To configure video settings

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the Video Settings item.

The General Video MCU Settings dialog box appears.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-14 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To configure video settings
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-7 General Video Settings
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Provide the appropriate settings for the following fields.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-15
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Selecting RADVISION
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-4 Video Settings
Video MCU Type You can select the MCU from the drop-down
list to support point-to-point and multipoint
video conferencing. Based on your selection,
different settings appear.
Note: Refer to your MCU documentation
for additional information regarding your
specific MCU.
Video MCU IP Address This is the IP address of the selected MCU.
Video MCU Port This is the port used for communication
between OmniTouch ACS and your Video
MCU IP Address.
Enable Peer to Peer Video RTP If selected, peer-to-peer video is used for SIP
clients and OmniTouch ACS for 2-party video
(without the need of an MCU). If not
selected, peer-to-peer video may still be
available.
Note: The only supported P2P clients or
devices are Counterpath Eyebeam and the My
Teamwork web client. Other systems may
work, but they will not be supported by
Alcatel-Lucent.
No P2P RTP Device List This is a comma separated list of SIP devices
that do not support peer-to-peer RTP because
of SIP signaling issues. Video devices listed
here do not use peer-to-peer video.
Selecting RADVISION
My Teamwork supports the Radvision Scopia product line, software release 5.5 and 5.6,
for use with multipoint video conferencing funtionality.
Video Conference Type – This is Radvision’s conference type selector. Many pre-
provisioned numbered conference types are available. You can select one or contact your
Radvision MCU system administrator to arrange to have a new conference type created.
Retrieve Radvision service list now – This allows availability of the most current list of
any pre-provisioned conference types. If any new conference types have been created, they
will be present in the updated list.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-16 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To block the Radvision IVR from announcing you are in
a conference
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: You can configure a Radvision MCU with conference types that are unusable
on the system because they include references to hardware features that are not
automatically included in all Radvision systems. If a user selects one of these
conference types, they can schedule the conference, but the following error message
appears when trying to start the video portion of the conference:
Resources not available
Figure 2-8 Typical Settings for Radvision MCU Integration with ACS
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click the Save button when finished.

END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
To block the Radvision IVR from announcing you are in a

conference
This procedure will prevent the Radvision IVR from playing while the My Teamwork IVR
is playing.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 On the Radvision (Scopia), go to Services.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Edit a service that is in use – typically, service prefix 82 which represents a 1B video call.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-17
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Reserved audio ports
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select Advanced Management and Security.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Select the Indications tab, and turn all of them off.

END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
Reserved audio ports

Reserved audio ports, which are also called audio port reservations or audio port limits
in the ACS Web Administration interface, allow an administrator to manage the
allocation of audio ports on a per-server or pre-organization basis. Based on this configured
data, individual users are able to allocate audio ports for scheduled conferences on a per
conference basis through the My Teamwork contact User Interface, using a port allocation
calendar while setting up a conference.
The administrator can allocate the maximum number of audio ports available for
scheduled conferences and/or for ad hoc conferences for each server or for each
organization. Audio ports for a server are allocated through Configuration–>System
Options. Audio ports for organizations are first enabled through Configuration–>System
Options. Then, the actual number of audio ports for the organizations is allocated through
Provisioning–>Organizations–>Settings.
Note: The allocation of audio ports on a per server basis is a different process than
allocating them on a per organization basis.
Server audio port limits

There are two fields on the System Options page that can be enabled and port limit set.
Scheduled Conference Audio Port Limits – The number of ports specified here sets the
minimum number of audio ports that the system will guarantee are available for scheduled
conferences, if there is no overbooking. This is also the maximum number of the total
audio ports that can be reserved by users for scheduled conferences on this server.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-18 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Overbooking and not overbooking audio ports
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Adhoc/Reservationless Conference Audio Port Limits – The number of ports specified

here sets the minimum number of audio ports that the system will guarantee are available
for reservationless and ad hoc conferences, if there is no overbooking. This is also the
maximum number of the total audio ports that can be used for ad hoc or reservationless
conferences on this server.
Overbooking and not overbooking audio ports

If the sum of the Scheduled Audio Port Limits and the Adhoc/Reservationless Audio
Port Limits is less than or equal to the total ports on the system, the port limits are not
overbooked, and the number of ports specified in each field will definitely be available.
Advantages of not overbooking

• Specified number of ports is guaranteed.
• Users who reserve ports will be guaranteed access when the conference starts.
Disadvantages of not overbooking

• Ports are locked for one type of conference (for example, scheduled conferences).
• Ports not being used cannot be accessed by users for another type of conference (for
example, reservationless conference).
Example:
Total ports on the system = 100
Scheduled conferences = 60
Ad hoc/reservationless conferences = 40
This system is not overbooked. (60+40 <=100) If users allocated 60 ports for scheduled
conferences occurring at a specific time, it is guaranteed that those ports will be available
when the conference starts. If there are no scheduled conferences taking place at another
time (booked), and there is a need for 50 ports for reservationless conferences, only 40 of
the 50 ports can be used. This is because 60 ports are held for potential scheduled
conferences even though they are not currently in use or reserved for that time slot.
If the sum of the Scheduled Audio Port Limits and the Adhoc/Reservationless Audio
Port Limits is greater than the total ports on the system, the port limits are overbooked
and the number of ports specified in each field will not be guaranteed to be available.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-19
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Organization audio port limits
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Advantages of overbooking
• Potential use of more ports.
• Ports are not locked to and associated with only one type of conference.
Disadvantage of overbooking
• Reserved ports may not all be available when a conference starts.
Example:
Total ports on the system = 100
Scheduled conferences = 90
Ad hoc/reservationless conferences = 80
This system is overbooked. (90+80 >100) Users can reserve up to 90 audio ports for a
conferences scheduled for specific time slots. Users can also use up to 80 audio ports for ad
hoc or reservationless conferences occurring during the same time slot. When the specified
time slot arrives, if the reservationless conferences are the first to use all of their allocated
80 ports, the scheduled conferences will only be able to use 20 of their reserved 80 ports (a
shortage of 60 ports). Users expecting their reserved ports to be available will not get them.
Organization audio port limits

You must first enable the ability to allocate audio ports for an organization by checking the
box next to the Allocate Audio Ports per Organization field on the System Options
page. Checking this field will inactivate (grey out) the fields for server audio port limits
because they are not connected to one another.
After enabling ports to be allocated per organization, you will need to go to
Provisioning–>Organizations–>Settings to allocate ports for each organization.
There are two fields on the Settings page that are used to set port limits for an
organization.
Scheduled Conference Port Limits
Adhoc/Reservationless Conference Port Limits
These fields behave in the same manner as the corresponding server audio port limit fields
described above in “Server audio port limits” (p. 2-18), except the allocated ports are
specified for an organization rather than a server.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-20 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To configure system options
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To configure system options

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the System Options item.

The following screen appears.
Figure 2-9 System Options
The fields in this screen are described below.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-21
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Not all options are available for all deployments. Options that are not
relevant to your installation are automatically hidden.
Table 2-5 Fields: System Options
International Dialing Prefix These are the digits used before dialing
international calls, from the site where the
Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch Advanced
Communications Server (ACS) is installed.
National Dialing Prefix These are the digits required to make domestic
toll calls.
Country Code This is the country code of the location where
the OmniTouch ACS is installed.
Time Zone This is the time zone of the location where the
server is installed. This setting also determines
the default time zone used when scheduling
conferences.
Voice Interface Alarm Email This is the email address of the person who
gets notified of alarms on the T1 trunk
interface (typically the system administrator).
In an IP-only system, this setting does not
apply and will not appear.
Voice Interface Alert Email This is the email address of the person who
gets notified of alerts on the T1 trunk
interface (typically the system administrator).
In an IP-only system, this setting does not
apply and will not appear.
Note: Generally, Alerts convey important
status information and Alarms convey
information that may impede critical
processes.
General Alarm Email This is the email address of the person who
gets notified of general alarms (typically the
system administrator).
General Alert Email This is the email address of the person who
gets notified of general alerts (typically the
system administrator).
Webserver Admin Email This is the email address of the system
administrator. Webserver alerts are sent to this
address.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-22 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Smart Mail Relay Host This is the address of a smart mail relay host.
This applies if you are routing email to an
intermediate mail server.
Note: This setting must be either a FQDN
or an IP Address in brackets.
Example: [10.1.1.1]
Use HTTPS Only This setting requires that all user sessions and
web presentations are handled by SSL
encrypted browser connections (HTTPS). If
you select this setting, you must also enable
port 443 in any firewall that is deployed
between an OmniTouch ACS application and
the users who access it through the internet.
Note: All log files generated through ACS
can be retrieved through port 443 at
https://servername/admin/getlogs.html.
Conference URLs This determines whether conference URLs
(including those that are used for web
presentations) are protected (encrypted) by
SSL (HTTPS) or not encrypted by SSL
(HTTP). If you select HTTPS, ensure that
port 443 is open on any firewall that is
deployed between an OmniTouch ACS
application and the internet.
User Login Timeout This is the period of time of user inactivity
before a user’s browser session with an
OmniTouch ACS application is automatically
terminated. Because a session can remain
open during a conference call, and because
that session may be used for call control at
some point well after that call has started, this
should be set to long enough that users won’t
be logged out during a call, but short enough
that an open session does not constitute a
potential security issue. This defaults to 8
hours.
If a user checks the “Automatically log me in
on this computer” box on that user’s sign-in
page, this timeout will not apply to that user
on that computer.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-23
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Max ICS Sessions for this Server This is the maximum number of users allowed
to be concurrently logged into the server. The
default is 10,000.
Minimum IVR Access Code Length This is the minimum number of digits required
by the IVR in a valid conference access code.
The factory default for this is 7. In standard
installations, this should be left unchanged.
Delete Expired Conferences This setting enables the deletion of
conferences that exceed the configured
timeout.
Expired Conference Timeout The length of time in days after which an
expired conference will be deleted from the
system.
Detect Active Talker This allows a conference leader to view who is
talking through a visual indicator. (The
conference leader may mute that individual, if
required.)
Application Sharing Color Depth (8 Bit; This allows setting of color depth according to
16 Bit) available bandwidth for application sharing.
Allow anonymous participants to share This setting enables anonymous participants
their desktop or application (not leaders) who do not have a My Teamwork
account to share their applications or
desktops.
Note: Anonymous participants may use
Internet Explorer or any Java enabled browser
to view an application that is shared. The
person who is uploading the application
(attachment) to be shared must use Internet
Explorer as their browser.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-24 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Media port management

The Administrator must configure the number of ports appropriate for an organization,
and keep track of the number of ports allocated to each organization. It is recommended
that the allocation of ports follow a hierarchy. The number of ports at each level (server,
conferences, organizations, and more) should scope the total number of ports at all levels.
For example, if there are multiple servers in a stack, the levels should consider the sum of
resources from the level above (ports on all servers in a stack are summed to achieve total
ports).
If a server is temporarily removed from the stack, the sum should remain the same because
that server will come back online. If the server is permanently removed from the stack, the
number of ports allocated to its use should be removed from the sum.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-25
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-6 Field: Media Port Management

Max Audio Ports for this Server Used to limit the number of audio legs that can
be included on a server. The default maximum
number of legs is 600.
Note: Audio ports and VoIP ports are summed until the total is reached.
Example:
Case 1
325 ports in use for VoIP
275 ports left for PSTN use
Total = 600 ports
Case 2
200 ports in use for VoIP
400 ports left for PSTN use
Total = 600 ports
Max AppSharing Ports for this Server Used to limit the number of shared applications
that can be included on a server. The maximum
number of shared applications on a server is 400.
Audio Port Usage Notification Threshold If the number of concurrent ports being used on
the server reaches the total number configured,
an email is sent to the email address specified in
the Voice Interface Alert Email field.
Note: A Voice Interface Alert Email is only available for configurations with a TDM Network
Interface Module. An alert will be present in the System Alerts Log, whether or not a TDM
Network Interface Module is configured.
Example:
Tues Jan 23 11:46:20 CET 2007
TPS-2001
Trunk Alert
Alcatel-Lucent server alert
TPS-2001 4 ports are currently in use 796 ports are free at Tue Jan
23 11:46:20 CET 2007
Allocate Audio Ports per Organization If selected, audio ports must be allocated for
individual organizations in Provisioning.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-26 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Important! Alcatel-Lucent recommends that the Administrator keep track of the total ports
allocated for the system and the number of ports taken up for each organization.
Note: If the Allocate Audio Ports per Organization item is not selected (not checked),
the Port Limit fields on the Provisioning -> Organizations -> Settings page will appear gray
and will be unavailable for editing.
Scheduled Conference Audio Port Limits This setting allows users to specify the number
(Enabled) of ports they expect to use when scheduling a
one-time or recurring conference. If a
conference is scheduled for a time when there
are fewer than the ‘port reservation’ number of
ports free, the user gets a message as seen in
Figure 2-10, “Not Enough Slots Available”
(p. 2-28) and the ports do not get allocated. The
user can:
• Request fewer slots
• Select a different time
• Check availability through the port
allocation calendar accessed by clicking the
View Available times... button. The Port
calendar (Figure 2-11, “Port Calendar”
(p. 2-28)) appears showing which slots are
available and which slots are busy.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-27
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-10 Not Enough Slots Available
Figure 2-11 Port Calendar
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-28 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To set system options and media port management
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Adhoc/Reservationless Conference This setting allocates the maximum number of

Audio Port Limits (Enabled) ports available for use for spontaneous
conferences.
Note: Extensive use of ad hoc calling may cause ports to be unavailable even when they
appeared free when the conference was scheduled.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
To set system options and media port management

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click the System Options item.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Enter the information in the text and check box(es) provided (Figure 2-9).
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
To set date, time and time zone

The local date and time where the server is physically installed should be set. This time
automatically adjusts for daylight savings, based on the time zone setting (above).
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Set the server’s time zone in the drop-down list

(Figure 2-9); click Save.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Set Date and Time in the Date/Time fields.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Set Date/Time.

END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-29
November 20, 2008

System Configuration SIP proxies (VoIP configuration)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SIP proxies (VoIP configuration)

You use these fields to set up UDP proxies for installations using VoIP connections to
OmniTouch ACS. UDP proxies are needed when OmniTouch ACS needs to interface
with a SIP gateway, PBX, or SIP proxy server external to OmniTouch ACS. For example,
if a SIP PBX requires OmniTouch ACS to register before it will accept traffic to or from
OmniTouch ACS, a proxy needs to be configured that specifies the gateway’s registration
information: SIP User Name, Authorization User Name, Authorization Password,
Realm (domain name), Server IP Address, and Server Port. (For SIP, the default is
5060. However, another port may be designated.) Lists of telephone numbers (EXTs) to be
proxied to OmniTouch ACS can also be specified.
Figure 2-12 SIP (UDP) Proxies Form
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-30 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following entries will be site- and installation-specific. Contact your customer support
representative for more information regarding your particular installation.
Table 2-7 Default Outbound SIP Proxy Fields

OXE 9.0 Spatial Redundancy Mode Check this box if you are using an Alcatel-
Lucent OmniPCX 9.0 as your proxy server. The
following screen shows the fields that are
displayed if OXE 9.0 Spatial Redundancy
Mode is enabled for the default outbound SIP
proxy.
Figure 2-13 Outbound OXE 9.0 Spatial Redundancy Mode
Default Outbound Proxy (Port) If specified, all SIP invites will first go to this IP
address (When OXE 9.0 Spatial Redundancy
Mode is enabled, this can only be a name). If
other realms are specified, this address will be
overridden. (Port number associated with the
Default Outbound Proxy.)
DNS Server This is the IP Address of the primary OXE 9.0
(Only appears if OXE 9.0 Spatial Redundancy server.
Mode is enabled.)
Alternate DNS Server This is the IP Address of the secondary OXE 9.0
Mode is enabled.)
Alternate Outbound Proxy (Port) If specified, all SIP invites will go to this IP
(Appears if OXE 9.0 Spatial Redundancy Mode address (or name) if the Default Outbound
is NOT enabled.) Proxy is unavailable. (Port number associated
with the Alternate Outbound Proxy.)
Failover Timeout (Seconds) If the Default Outbound Proxy cannot be
(Appears if OXE 9.0 Spatial Redundancy Mode contacted within this amount of time (in
is NOT enabled.) seconds), the Alternate Outbound Proxy is
contacted.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-31
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Proxy
SIP User Name This is the SIP name that should be registered
(optional) with the proxy in this section. If the field is
blank, no registration will be sent, but other
elements in this section will still be used for
messages to this proxy.
Note: SIP user names should not match
OmniTouch ACS user names because this is not
a supported configuration.
Authorization User Name If the proxy requests authorization, this value
(Appears if OXE 9.0 Spatial Redundancy Mode will be used as the authorization user name.
is NOT enabled.)
Authorization Password This is the password used by the SIP server for
(Appears if OXE 9.0 Spatial Redundancy Mode authentication to allow access to the
is NOT enabled.) OmniTouch ACS server.
Realm This is the name of the server to be used. All SIP
(Appears if OXE 9.0 Spatial Redundancy Mode messages to a SIP URL with this Realm as
is NOT enabled.) hostname will be sent to the Server IP Address
for this proxy.
Server IP Name This is the name of the OXE 9.0 server. The
(Only appears if OXE 9.0 Spatial Redundancy name is registered to the Proxy IP Addresses.
Mode is enabled.)
DNS Server This is the IP Address of the primary OXE 9.0
Mode is enabled.)
Alternate DNS Server This is the IP Address of the secondary OXE 9.0
Mode is enabled.)
Server IP Address (Port) This IP address may be different from the one
(Appears if OXE 9.0 Spatial Redundancy Mode associated with the Realm (for example, SIP
is NOT enabled.) aware NAT device). Intermediary
authentication takes place here before making
contact with the destination server (realm). The
default port number associated with the Server
IP Address is 5060. However, another port may
be specified.
Alternate Server IP (Port) If the Default Server IP Address is unavailable
(Appears if OXE 9.0 Spatial Redundancy Mode for intermediary authentication, authentication
is NOT enabled.) takes place at the Alternate Server IP.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-32 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Voice prompts
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Failover Timeout (Seconds) If the Default cannot be contacted within this

(Does NOT appear if OXE 9.0 Spatial amount of time (in seconds), the Alternate
Redundancy Mode is enabled.) Server IP is contacted for authentication.
Use TCP Check this box to use TCP instead of UDP.
Note: Microsoft Office Communicator® and
Microsoft Office Live Communication Server®
(MOC/LCS) audio and video conferencing
require SIP communication use TCP.
New (button) Click this button to add a new proxy. (maximum
of 20)
Delete Proxy (button) Click this button to delete a proxy.
Voice prompts
The Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch Advanced Communications Server (ACS) comes
preloaded with a full set of voice prompts for all interactions between the user and the
IVR. You can install multiple sets of prompts, allowing custom prompts or support for
multiple languages. Custom prompts should be stored in 8 kHz, 8 bit, monophonic, .wav
format. Other .wav file formats (such as 44 kHz, 16 bit, stereo) formats can be used.
OmniTouch ACS will automatically convert these formats to 8 kHz, 8 bit, monophonic
mu-law, for compatibility with telephone networks.
Note: The default prompt set is associated with an organization. You can create
multiple organizations within a Domain and associate a prompt set that uses a different
language with each organization (Domains–>Edit Organization). However, users
cannot belong to more than one organization within a Domain.
A prompt set can also be associated with an individual telephone number within an
organization.
Because the Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch Advanced Communications Server (ACS) uses
over 200 prompts, it is easiest to manage prompts in sets, each set including all prompts for
that set.
Downloading a prompt set file

To update one or more voice prompts, it is most convenient to start with the default
prompt set that ships with the Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch Advanced Communications
Server (ACS). You do this by downloading the default prompt set onto your PC.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-33
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To download a prompt set
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To download a prompt set

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Voice Prompts item.

The Prompt set management dialog box appears.
Figure 2-14 Prompt Set Management
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the prompt set you want to start with.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click the Download button.

The following dialog box appears (dependant on your version of Windows).
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-34 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To download a prompt set
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-15 File Download Dialog Box
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click Save.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Place the file in a folder on your PC.

The resulting ZIP file contains multiple voice prompts.
Figure 2-16 Voice Prompt Files
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-35
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To update or change the voice prompts
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Each prompt is saved in an 8 kHz, 8 bit, monophonic .wav format. The complete list of
prompts is provided in see Appendix C, Voice Prompts.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
To update or change the voice prompts

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Create the individual prompt voice files in 8 kHz, 8 bit .wav format.
OmniTouch ACS does not support direct recording of prompts to the server. However,
many commercial audio recording applications and professional recording services can be
used for creating the individual prompt files.
Note: The prompt files should be named 00.wav through 279.wav. To reference the
wording of the default prompts, see Appendix C, Voice Prompts.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 When uploading a partial prompt set, save updated prompts only and the version.txt files
in a compressed .zip format file on your PC. If you are uploading all new prompts, a full
prompt set and the version.txt file in a compressed .zip format file is needed.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Once the new prompt set file is created, upload that prompt set .zip file to the server, by
following these steps:
1. Click the Browse button and select your new prompt set file (or type in the full path
name to the Prompt set file).
2. Enter a Prompt set name (which will make it easier to manage multiple prompt sets in
the future). The name must be alphanumeric. It is not case sensitive.
3. Click Add new set.
Figure 2-17 Adding a Prompt Set
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-36 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To edit the prompt set
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
All voice prompt sets are displayed after they have been added.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
To edit the prompt set

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click the Edit button next to that prompt set.

This places the Prompt set name in the text box in the upper portion of the page.
Figure 2-18 Edit Prompt Set
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Browse button to locate the ZIP file that contains the changed prompts.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click the Submit Changes button.

END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-37
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To edit the prompt set
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You can also delete a prompt set by clicking the Delete button or revert to the current
factory default set by clicking the Revert to Factory Default button.
Note: The default English-US prompt set cannot be deleted. If you upload a new
version of an existing prompt set (that is, if you upload a new file while editing a
prompt set), only the prompts which are defined in the new file will be replaced. Other
prompts will be left as they were.
To assign a prompt set to an organization, see Chapter 4, “Provisioning and Account
Management”.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-38 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Domains
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Domains
Every organization is a member of a single OmniTouch ACS Domain and multiple
organizations may be associated with the same Domain. Users on one Domain cannot
communicate with users on another Domain.
To create a new Domain

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Domains item.

The Create New Domain dialog box appears.
Figure 2-19 Create New Domain
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Type the new Domain Name in the box.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click the Add button.

The new Domain Name is added to the List of Domains.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-39
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To edit Domain settings
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To edit Domain settings

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click Edit in the Settings column next to the Domain Name.
Figure 2-20 Edit Domain
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Complete the following fields.
Table 2-8 Domain Fields

Domain Name This is the current name of the Domain. You
can change the name by deleting the old name
and typing a new name in the box.
Branding This is the current branding used. If licensed,
you (system-wide administrator) can change the
branding by selecting another branding file from
those available in the drop-down list.
Server Name This is the name of the server where the domain
resides.
Server Address This is the Server IP Address.
Cluster Name This is the current name (FQDN) of the cluster
(multiple servers). You can change the name by
deleting the old name and typing a new name in
the box. (see “Stacking” (p. 2-75))
Example: mtw.company.com
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-40 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration SSL certificates
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cluster Address This is the cluster IP Address. A cluster address

can only be used as a destination.
Cookie Domain This is the Cookie Domain name for the stack
(typically the Domain Name shared by all the
servers in the stack).
If you want the Cookie Domain name to
represent multiple Domains, this entry must
begin with a dot.
Examples:
.research.office
.sales.office
Web Interface Language This is the list of available interface languages
that have been added through Translation set
management. Select one from the drop-down
list to apply to the domain.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Update.
Note: You can delete a Domain by clicking the Delete Domain button. You cannot
delete the DEFAULT Domain.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
SSL certificates
OmniTouch ACS comes configured with a default digital certificate, which is used during
HTTPS (SSL) sessions or SIP (SSL) sessions. This option allows you to update or replace
the Digital certificate used by the web server. The certificate should be generated on a
separate server using standard tools and the specific name of the server for which the
certificate is being generated.
To install an SSL certificate

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-41
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To install an SSL certificate
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click the Edit button in the SSL Certificates column for the appropriate Domain.
The Install SSL Certificates page for that specific Domain appears.
Figure 2-21 Install SSL Certificates
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Generate your SSL certificate.

You can generate SSL certificates in two ways. If you need a signed certificate
(authentication procedure between the server and the client), click the Generate an SSL
certificate request link to access the following page. Click the Submit button, when all
required fields are completed.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-42 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To add a new trusted certificate authority
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-22 Request SSL Certificate
If you do not need a certificate signed by a certificate authority (authenticating the server
to the client is not important), click the Generate self-signed SSL cert link.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 After your certificate file is obtained and saved, enter the path name of the file containing
the certificate – optionally use the Browse button to locate the file.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Enter the path name of the file containing the digital key corresponding to the certificate –
optionally, use the Browse button to find the file.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 If the key is password protected, enter the password.
Note: When searching for a Cluster Certificate, make certain the Certificate
matches the Cluster name.
To allow client/server applications to communicate with Mutually Authenticated
Transport Layer Security (TLS), check Use MTLS.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
To add a new trusted certificate authority

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Browse to locate the certificate in PEM (Privacy-Enhanced Mail) format.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Submit.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-43
November 20, 2008

System Configuration User Authentication
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Certificate authorities such as VeriSign, Thawte, and OpenCA need to

authenticate the certificate.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
User Authentication
OmniTouch ACS is capable of interfacing corporate directories for the purpose of user
authorization and auto provisioning.
Figure 2-23 Domain User Authentication
Internal database
Select Internal database to query OmniTouch ACS’s own internal database to see if a
username and password are authorized.
LDAP configuration (Authentication and Auto Provisioning)

Select LDAP to use an LDAP query to authenticate a user. Rather than querying
OmniTouch ACS’s own internal database to see if the username and password are
authorized, an LDAP query will be launched against the corporate directory. If the
response back to the server indicates that the username and password combination is
legitimate, OmniTouch ACS will allow that user to access the system for scheduling and
placing calls.
Under this arrangement, the user’s password, if auto-provisioned, will not be stored on the
OmniTouch ACS, and you will not need to administer the user database on OmniTouch
ACS (except to change users who do not have default authorization levels for enhanced
service features).
OmniTouch ACS also uses the LDAP query process to enable auto provisioning. If the
LDAP query indicates that the username and password are legitimate but that username
has not yet been provisioned as an OmniTouch ACS user, then the server will
automatically establish an account for that user if auto-provisioning is set. The user will be
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-44 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To configure LDAP
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
set up with the default level of authorization to use the system’s special features and will be
able to start using the OmniTouch ACS system immediately. (These defaults are set by the
system administrator, usually during initial configuration.)
If the user requires authorizations that differ from the system defaults, then you can use the
system administrator’s interface to change that user’s profile, (see To modify or delete user
accounts).
OmniTouch ACS 7.1.4 has been certified for use with Sun Microsystems iPlanet Directory
Server and Microsoft’s Active Directory LDAP interfaces.
Note: A Client Connector user on a system that uses LDAP for authentication is
the only user on that system to use the internal ACS authentication instead of LDAP
for authentication.
To configure LDAP
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select LDAP.
The LDAP Configuration page for that specific Domain appears.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-45
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-24 LDAP Configuration Options
Shown are sample LDAP configuration options for the iPlanet LDAP directory and
Microsoft’s Active Directory. The options you choose will be installation specific; please
contact your support representative for assistance, if needed.
Note: If you require searching of multiple Domains, Alcatel-Lucent recommends

using Active Directory’s Global Catalog feature.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Enter LDAP Server information.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-46 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-9 LDAP Server Information

Server Name (Port) The name of the server where the LDAP
database resides and the port number on which
the LDAP server communicates with clients.
Search Base The distinguished name that defines the
location in the directory from which to begin
searching. OmniTouch ACS servers search at
the subtree level (searches the entire subtree
including the distinguished base name which is
the topmost object). In a distinguished name,
CN means CommonName and DC means
DomainComponent.
LDAP Admin ID This is a vendor-specific Administrator ID that
must have the required LDAP privileges.
LDAP Admin ID Password The password for the Administrator on the
LDAP server. (Different from OmniTouch ACS
Administrator password.)
LDAP UID Field A vendor-specific LDAP user ID.
Email Domain The Domain of the server where the LDAP
database resides. If the LDAP schema for a user
does not have an email field, the Email Domain
is appended to the User logon.
Auto Synchronize If selected, once a day, the OmniTouch ACS
user database resynchronizes with the LDAP
database. If a user password has changed,
authentication takes place again. If a user has
been deleted, his or her account is removed.
Auto Provisioning This may be checked to enable auto
provisioning for specific organizations within a
domain.
Enable SSL (LDAPS) This may be checked to enable secure LDAP
providing encryption for all data exchanged
between the LDAP server and OmniTouch
ACS.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Test Connectivity to test your settings.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If your test is successful, click the Submit button in the top box on this page.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-47
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Unified Communication
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unified Communication
This is used when an Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch Unified Communications server
corporate directory is used for user authentication and provisioning. When users attempt
to log on to an OmniTouch ACS application, a query will be redirected to the Unified
Communications server for authentication.
To configure Unified Communication Authentication

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select OmniTouch Unified Communication.

The OmniTouch Unified Communications Authentication Configuration page for that
specific Domain appears.
Figure 2-25 External Authentication
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Enter Server information.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-48 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration List organizations
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-10 Unified Communications Server Information

Auth Server Host Name This is the name (or IP Address) of the Alcatel-
Lucent OmniTouch Unified Communications
Server where authentication requests from the
OmniTouch ACS will take place.
Authentication Port This is the port number on the Unified
Communications server where requests for
authentication will be received.
Use SSL Check this box to provide encryption for all data
exchanged between the Unified
Communications Server and OmniTouch ACS.
Authentication Timeout (minutes) After this period of time, OmniTouch ACS will
resend the Authentication request.
Auto Provisioning Check this box to activate the drop-down list
where you can select an organization within the
domain that will use the OmniTouch Unified
Communications server for authentication.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click the Submit button.

END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
List organizations
The first step in provisioning an OmniTouch ACS is to add the organizations to various
Domains that will be using the system. The server comes preconfigured with one
organization – DEFAULT. You can edit settings and preferences associated with each
organization.
To view a list of organizations

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-49
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To view a list of organizations
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click the List button in the Organizations column for the appropriate Domain.
The List of Organizations page for that specific Domain appears.
Figure 2-26 List Organizations
The Domain and the name for each organization appears in the list.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 You can edit settings and preferences for an organization through links.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-50 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To view a list of organizations
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-27 List Organizations Links

Settings This contains an Edit link to a page where you
can make changes to an organization’s settings
(for example, organization name, domain
affiliation, default prompt set, default caller ID,
disk quota).
Phones This contains an Edit link to a page that allows
configuration of up to 16 phone numbers per
organization. A different prompt set may be
configured for each number allowing use of
multiple prompt sets within a single
organization. Phone numbers may also be
designated as toll free for integration with third-
party systems such as Microsoft Office
Communicator or IBM Lotus Sametime.
Default User Settings This contains an Edit link to a page where you
can make changes to the Default User Settings
for an organization (for example, reservationless
call criteria, enabling/disabling application
sharing, video, dial out, disk quota, IP
audio/video preferences).
Default User Preferences This contains an Edit link to a page where you
can make changes to the Default User
Preferences for an organization (for example,
Web interface language, default status after sign-
in, e-mail invitation format, reactive behavior to
IM deliveries).
Password Policy This contains an Edit link to a page where you
can make changes to the password requirements
for specific organizations within a Domain.
Call Blocking This contains an Edit link to the page where
you can create a new blocking rule or apply an
available rule to an organization within a
Domain or to all organizations in a Domain. You
can also test your rules.
Users This contains a List link to a searchable list of
all users in a particular organization in a
Domain. You can search for a specific user by
typing a partial user name, selecting an
organization, and showing the disk usage of that
user. When the user name appears, you can click
on it leading to additional pages where you can
manage that user’s settings and preferences.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-51
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Branding
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Branding
The Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch Advanced Communications Server comes preloaded
with a default branding file (brand_default.zip). If licensed, you can download it, edit it,
and maintain additional branding files.
The branding.conf file in the brand_default.zip contains three data types that can be
edited (strings; colors; images). The file is saved in UTF-8 format. UNICODE and 7-bit
ASCII are also supported. However, these file types will be converted to UTF-8 after they
are uploaded to the server.
Note: Each domain can contain only one brand. If you require multiple brands, a
domain must be created for each (for example, five companies = five domains = five
brands). Changes to the layout of the User Interface are not allowed; only existing
fields may be branded in the default format. Images, colors (hexadecimal), and text
(strings) related to the branding may be changed.
Table 2-11 Branding Data Types
Data Type Description

Strings They can consist of any text characters.
Colors Colors are represented in hexidecimal RGB
format.
Example: FFFFFF represents white
Images To change an image:

1. Create and add a gif or jpeg into the
brand_default.zip file.
2. Replace the “value” of the field with the
image’s filename. Do not include any path
information (no forward slash /).
Example:
Existing image is
default “/images/logo.jpg”;
Replacement image is
default “new_logo.jpg”;
The only administrator allowed to upload branding information is a System-wide

Administrator.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-52 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To edit a branding file
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To edit a branding file

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Branding item.
Figure 2-28 Branding Management
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click the Download button to locate the brand_default.zip file. The brand_default.zip file
contains the branding.conf file that may be edited.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Save the brand_default.zip file to your hard drive.
Figure 2-29 Branding File Download
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-53
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Extract the branding.conf file from the Zip file.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Open the file in Notepad.
Note: Do not open the file in Wordpad or a word processing editor (for example,
Microsoft Word) because important formatting may not be retained.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-54 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Make your changes.
Note: The data types that may not be changed appear toward the end of the .conf
file and “Do not change this:”, is clearly noted in the --HELP “Description Text.”
The branding.conf file consists of three data types:
• Strings
• Colors
• Images (“Branding Data Types” (p. 2-52).
Entries in this file are formatted as follows:
eDialBrand.KEY_NAME: This is the name of the field. It is used internally by the system,
and should not be changed.
--HELP “Description Text”, This is a line of text which describes where this field is used. This
should not be changed.
default “value”; This line contains two fields:
“value” – This is the value that appears in the field and will
appear in the user interface.
“default” – This refers to the language. If you do not provide
additional translations for this field, all languages will use the
default.
To add additional languages:

1. Replace the semi-colon with a comma.
2. Insert an additional row below the ‘default’ translation, using the language code in the
LANGUAGES list. Any language code added must be present on the Translation page
of the ACS Administration Interface.
Example: To add French and Italian translations and use the default for all other
languages:
default “value”,
FRE-FR “French value”,
ITA-IT “Italian value”;
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-55
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Languages
Values can be translated for multiple languages, if additional translations are added.
The following languages may be added:
CHT-TWTraditional Chinese
DEU-DEGerman
ENG-USEnglish
FRE-FRFrench
ITA-ITItalian
JPN-JP Japanese
KOR-KNKorean
NLD-NLDutch
POR-PTPortuguese
SPA-ESSpanish
ZHO-CNSimplified Chinese
default
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Save your file as branding.conf, when finished.
Note: You should create a new ZIP file if you want to maintain the original file.
When the ZIP file is uploaded to the server, the new branding will overwrite the
existing brand.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-56 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To add a branding file
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-30 Branding File
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
To add a branding file

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click the Browse button to locate the ZIP file associated with your desired branding.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the file and click Open.

The selected file name appears in the File box.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter an appropriate Name and Description.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click the Add New button.

The branding file is added to the list.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-57
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Translation tables
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: You can edit, download, or delete a branding file. The Default branding file
cannot be deleted.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
Translation tables
The Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch Advanced Communications Server comes preloaded
with a DEFAULT US English Dictionary. You can download and maintain additional
dictionaries The following additional ten languages are available.
• French
• German
• Dutch
• Italian
• Spanish
• Portuguese
• Chinese (Simplified characters and Mandarin voice prompts)
• Korean
• Japanese
• UK English (voice prompts only)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-58 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To add a translation set file
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-31 Translation Sets
Translation sets (dictionaries) are configured at the Domain level through

Configuration–>Domains–>Settings–>Web Interface Language. A Translation set
that differs from one that is being used at the Domain level can be assigned to an
individual user through Provisioning–>List User–>User Preferences–>Web Interface
Language.
Note: New translation sets (languages) must first be added at the organization level
before they can be assigned at the user level.
To add a translation set file

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click the Browse button to locate the xlatset.zip file associated with your required
language.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the file and click Open.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-59
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To edit a translation set file
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 The selected file name appears in the Translation set file box.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Enter a Translation set name.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click the Add New button.

The Translation set file is added to the list.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
To edit a translation set file

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Translation Tables item.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click the Download button to locate the xlatset.zip file associated with the language you
want to edit. The xlatset.zip file contains the dictionary.txt file and all graphic files that
may be edited.
Note: To edit Help files, you must use an HTML editor (Wordpad). Do not use
Microsoft Word to edit any HTML files.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Open the dictionary.txt file you want to edit using Wordpad.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Locate any strings you want to modify and make your changes.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Save your file, when finished. (.txt for dictionary files and .html for Help files).
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-60 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To edit a translation set file
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Replace the English files with your edited files and rename the revised xlatset.zip file using
the following naming convention:
xlatset_3-letter language_2-letter country.zip
Example:
xlatset_RUS_RU.zip
Important! You should always create a new ZIP file if you want to maintain the
original file. If upgrading, English will replace the edited files.
Figure 2-32 Language Files
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-61
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Access codes
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Access codes
The Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch Advanced Communication Server (ACS) provides two
ways to increase the number of available access codes without generating longer codes
using the following screen.
Figure 2-33 Access Code Generation
To set the range of access codes

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Access Codes item.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Increase the number of Access Codes:

Change the Access Code format to include either two digits or one digit of Node ID (a
requirement for routing in stacked environments). The one digit Node ID increases
the Access Code count to 1,000,000 per server.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-62 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Music on Hold settings
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: In the one digit format, all Application servers must have a Node ID of 1-9.
On a stack with data replication, this limits deployment to four pair of application
servers.
AND/OR
Assign Access Codes per Domain. This allows 100,000 or 1,000,000 Access Codes per
Domain (dependant on Access Code format).
Each Domain on a server can have its own Access Code range.
The same access code can be present in multiple domains on an application server.
Each Domain must have a unique set of Organization phone numbers.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-12 Access Code Format Examples
Access Code Format Examples

Two digits of Node ID followed by five Node ID is 7: Valid access codes are 0712332,
random or user specified digits 0714565, etc.
One digit of Node ID followed by six Node ID is 7: Valid access codes are 7112345,
random or user specified digits 7346839, etc.
Note: If your Node ID is only one digit and your access code format is two digit, the
system will add the leading zero to create a valid access code.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
Music on Hold settings

The Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch Advanced Communications Server (ACS) ships with a
.wav file for Music On Hold. You can determine whether music is heard by users on hold,
and if so, what music is played. Any alternative Music On Hold file should be stored in a 8
Kb/s, 8 bit, monophonic mu-law .wav file format.
Note: By default, all organizations in the same Domain share the same Music On
Hold. However, this can be set for each organization within the same Domain to allow
individual organizations in the same Domain to have different Music On Hold.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-63
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Licensing
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-34 Music on Hold Update Screen
Licensing
Port capacity of an Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch Advanced Communications Server
(ACS) is controlled by a license certificate. This certificate is associated with the specific
server hardware, and is loaded on the server at the time of manufacture. (It is generated
based on the System Serial Number shown in the figure that follows. This serial number is
unique to each server.)
If you purchase a port upgrade from Alcatel-Lucent, or should there be a field repair to
your server hardware requiring a new license certificate, your support representative will
generate a new certificate; you may be asked to provide the System Serial Number.
If you need to change your licensing mode from 1 to 2 (requires relicensing), contact your
customer support representative for further information.
The following page is then used to install that certificate on your server.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-64 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-35 Licensing Page
Note: The fields that appear on this page may differ according to your license. (for
example, If licensed, AppSharing ports appears.)
OmniTouch ACS 7.1.4 requires a RedHat Enterprise 4 (RHE4) license. The license may
be installed before or after an existing system is upgraded or a new system installation has
completed. After the upgrade or new installation, the system will successfully start.
However, the following features will not function properly until an associated, counted
OmniTouch ACS license is installed.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-65
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-13 Counted Licenses

Primary audio ports This is the total number of audio ports allowed
for a system. (There is a maximum of 600 on a
single box system.)
Secondary audio ports This is the number of audio ports on the
secondary server in a stack.
G729 audio ports This is the maximum number of G729 devices
that can simultaneously connect to the server.
AppSharing ports This is the number of ports on the server
allowed for Application Sharing. (maximum
400)
Primary AMDS ports This license sets the maximum number of audio
ports that may be used by the AMDS broadcast
process. This license is only installed on an ACS
Application Server.
Secondary AMDS ports This is the maximum number of audio ports on
the Secondary server that may be used by the
AMDS broadcast process.
Max licensed users This is the maximum number of users that can
be provisioned on the server. The total number
of users currently configured on the system
appears in parentheses.
Note: The word ‘Unspecified’ indicates an
unlimited use of the license.
Max licensed video users This is the maximum number of Users who can
have the Allow Video User setting enabled. If
the maximum is reached, you can free up video
User licenses by removing the Allow Video
attribute from some Users and enabling it for
others.
Max licensed MOC users This is the maximum number of users who can
have the Allow MOC Conferencing setting
enabled. These Users can sign-in to My
Teamwork through the Alcatel-Lucent tab in
Microsoft Office Communicator.
Max licensed SAMETIME users This is the maximum number of users who can
have the Allow SAMETIME Conferencing
setting enabled.
Max licensed Mobile Gateway users This is the maximum number of users who can
have the Mobile Gateway User setting
enabled. These Users can log-in to the My
Teamwork Mobile Edition.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-66 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Max licensed AMDS users This is the maximum number of users who can
have the AMDS User setting enabled. These
Users can use the Automated Message Delivery
capability.
Table 2-14 Licensed Features

MOC Conferencing Users This license sets the maximum number of Users
who can have the Allow MOC Conferencing
setting enabled. These Users can sign-in to
OmniTouch My Teamwork (ACS) through the
Alcatel-Lucent tab in Microsoft Office
Communicator. (‘Unspecified’ indicates no limit.)
Video Users This license sets the maximum number of Users
who can have the Allow Video User setting
enabled. If the maximum is reached, you can
free up video User licenses by removing the
Allow Video attribute from some Users and
enabling it for others. (‘Unspecified’ indicates no
limit.)
Note: If there are more users that have
Allow Video enabled under a previous license
than what is allowed under a newly installed
license, existing users may temporarily use Video
until an administrator modifies their User
Settings.
Mobile Gateway Users This is the maximum number of users who can
have the Mobile Gateway User setting enabled.
These Users can log in to Alcatel-Lucent
OmniTouch My Teamwork Mobile Edition.
AMDS Ports This license sets the maximum number of audio
ports that may be used by the AMDS ‘blast’
process. This license is only installed on an
OmniTouch ACS Application Server.
Note: A system that was previously licensed for AMDS will continue to have all
audio ports available for AMDS use until a new license is installed that sets the
maximum number of AMDS audio ports that may be used.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-67
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To install a new license certificate
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To install a new license certificate

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Licensing item.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter the path name of the file containing the license certificate – optionally use the
Browse button to find the file.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click the Upload button.

END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
Note: To change licensing mode from 1 to 2 requires relicensing. Contact your

customer support representative for further information on changing your licensing
mode.
For servers configured with document sharing/presentation capabilities, certain third party
software is installed and must be licensed. Components are licensed from Microsoft and
VMware. If your system has been built without document sharing enabled, this part of the
screen will not appear.
Important! You will need to supply your own Microsoft licenses, see Construct
Document Conversion VM for important information about the Microsoft licenses.
When the system is installed, the VMware license must be uploaded.
To upload the VMware license

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Licensing item.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-68 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Automatic server backup
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter the path name of the file containing the VMware license certificate in the VMware
License file box – optionally use the Browse button to find the file.
Additional components are licensed from Microsoft. The Microsoft license (Office and
Windows) must be provided and accepted by the customer.
Important! If either of these two steps (VMware license upload and presence of
Microsoft license) is not performed, document sharing will not operate.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Submit. (This uploads the VMware license.)

END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
The Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch Advanced Communications Server also uses unmodified

open source software components which have their own licenses. These license
agreements can be displayed by clicking on the Open Source button.
Automatic server backup

OmniTouch ACS 7.1.4 supports automatic backup of the server and user data. Backups
are performed at a user configured time of low system traffic. All server databases place
system information needed for recovery from a system failure into a number of files, and
these files are then FTP’d or SCP’d to a storage location on the user’s IP network.
To enable automatic server backup

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Automatic Server Backup item.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-69
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To enable automatic server backup
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-36 Nightly Backup Settings
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter the Start Time in hour(s) and minutes (hh:mm) based on a 24-hour period.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Select the check box for Enable Automated Nightly Backups.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Enter Destination Host name and Destination Directory.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Enter User information (Backup User ID and Backup User ID Password).

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Break up large files into smaller sizes by using the Backup Chunk Size item. (The
recommended range is 128 MB to 1024 MB.)
Note: Alcatel-Lucent recommends using the largest chunks permitted for backup.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 If the Accept changed certificates checkbox is selected, all current and changed, or new
certificates will be accepted and backed up.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Choose backup method (SCP or FTP).

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 To verify your settings are correct, click the Verify Settings button.
A panel listing the verification progress and results appears.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-70 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Using a dedicated NIC card for backups
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-37 Backup Settings Verification
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 If you receive no error messages, click Save.

If you receive an error message, check the backup server path.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
Using a dedicated NIC card for backups

If your ACS server has a separate NIC card for backups, you need to configure ACS to use
this card to send data to the destination location.
To configure a separate NIC card for backups

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the TCP/IP Settings item.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter the IP Address and Net Mask of the additional Ethernet interface.
Do not assign any SIP or RTP use.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Configuration–>Advanced Settings–>Route Management.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Add the subnet and force routing through this additional Ethernet interface.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-71
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Remote sites
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If this step is not performed, ACS will send the IP packets through eth0 (default gateway).
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Connect the Ethernet cable to the appropriate Ethernet interface.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Reboot the server.
Note: If you connect the Ethernet interface to the wrong connector, you will have to
reconnect to the correct connector and reboot again.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
Remote sites
There are two methods by which Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch Advanced Communications
Servers can operate as an integrated set of servers when they are not co-located. The first
method is by setting up a stack which is connected by a private LAN over long-distance
links. The second method is through ‘federation’, by which Alcatel-Lucent servers are
configured to be aware of specific other servers. Federation is accomplished through the
configuration of Remote Sites. This allows conferences to be effectively bridged between
servers, with participants calling into the server nearest them, thereby minimizing long-
distance charges. Thus, if a conference includes 5 people in London and 5 people in Des
Moines, each person would call into their local server, and the only long distance link
would be a single conference trunk between the two servers. The link would persist only
while there are conferences active that span the two servers.
Remote sites are primarily designed to allow sharing of conference access codes among sets
of servers or stacks which are not co-located. They do, however, have certain functional
limitations. In many cases, a geographically distributed stack with dialing rules will be more
suitable. Please contact your sales representative if you are considering deploying
geographically distributed servers.
Remote Sites require some configuration on the stacking page. Although any stack name
that is defined pertains only to a local stack, node numbers among remote sites must all be
unique. This is because the same conference codes are scheduled on multiple servers.
The trunk between the servers can be either IP or PSTN. If it is PSTN, the phone number
that other servers should call to link to this server is configured on the Stacking
configuration page. In a PSTN configuration, a TDM Network Interface Module must be
present on both servers to allow them to connect. If no remote site phone number is
configured, but sites are defined, the link between them will be VoIP.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-72 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To add remote sites
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To set up a federation of servers, each server must be “made aware” of the other servers.
You do this by adding remote sites for each server.
Figure 2-38 Add or Edit a Remote Site
To add remote sites

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Remote Sites item.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 For each remote server, enter the fully qualified domain name of that remote server in the
Hostname field.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Enter the name of the remote stack that the remote server is associated with in the Stack
Name field.
Note: The Stack Name must be defined on the “Stack Parameters” page
(Configuration–>Stacking).
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 You can check the following:

Use Private Network for communication This is checked to initiate preferred use of
servers within your local private network (stack)
for calls. Calls that stay within the private
network go out through eth1.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-73
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To see a list of remote servers
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Spillover outbound calls When dialing out, all outbound connections on

the private network are first checked. If all
connections in the stack are at capacity, the call
will “spill over” to a remote site. Calls that spill
over to a remote site go out through eth0. This
works best if the sites are not geographically
spread out and you want to make use of
available capacity at other nearby sites.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click Update.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
To see a list of remote servers

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Remote Sites item.

This will bring up a list of federated servers (List of Remote Sites).
Figure 2-39 Remote Site List
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
To modify the settings for an existing remote server

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click the Edit button next to a specific server in the List of Remote Sites.
The settings for that remote site appear in the Add or Edit Remote Site dialog box.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-74 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To delete which servers are federated
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Modify the settings.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Update.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
To delete which servers are federated

• Click the Delete button next to a specific server in the List of Remote Sites.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
Stacking
OmniTouch ACS includes a facility for combining multiple systems into a single larger
virtual system or stack (for a general description of stacking, see the OmniTouch My
Teamwork Unified Conferencing and Collaboration Application Site Preparation Guide).
Installing a stack
Once the basic configuration has been completed for all servers, you are ready to assemble
an OmniTouch ACS stack. If you are new to this process, you may want to review the
stacking overview in the Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch Unified Communication My
Teamwork Site Preparation Guide before proceeding.
There are two Stacking methods – Dynamic and Static.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-75
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Stacking
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-15 Stacking Methods

Dynamic Stacking This “plug and play” setting is the preferred
configuration for stacks where all servers are co-
located. All servers connected through the IP
Stack Backplane that are configured with
identical Stack Names will automatically
discover each other and form the stack. Since
each server’s secondary IP addresses will be set
automatically based on its configured (manually
assigned) unique node ID, Dynamic stacking
requires that the secondary Ethernet switch, the
Stack Backplane, be dedicated to the stack with
no outside connections.
Static Stacking It is possible to statically configure a stack’s IP
addresses. This may be necessary, for example, if
a stack is geographically distributed between
cities. Static stacking requires that you specify
the Name, Primary IP Address, and Backplane
IP Address of all the servers in the stack. (You
may statically configure up to 10 servers in a
single stack.) Each server in the stack must be
manually configured with these parameters.
Also, for PSTN stacks, each PSTN gateway card
has an Ethernet port, which will also require a
static address.
All servers in a stack must be configured with the same ‘Stack Name.’ When naming, it is
suggested that you create a new domain for the stack, and then place each server in that
domain. For example, the Company Corporation may create the domain “company.com”
for its OmniTouch ACS stack, and then name each server in the stack using the following
sequential format.
Alcatel-Lucent1.company.com
Alcatel-Lucent2.company.com
You should also configure your DNS server to cycle among the servers (DNS Round
Robin) in your stack when resolving Stack Name, so that users can address the stack
through a single fully qualified domain name (FQDN).
Each server must have a unique Node ID. This Node ID will be used as the first two digits
of all conference access codes for this server’s users.
Note: If you change a system’s Node ID, all pre-existing conference access codes
owned by that Application Server will no longer be valid.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-76 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To configure each server in a stack
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
After physically configuring the servers, and going through the steps documented earlier to
set up IP addresses and other server-specific settings, do the following for each server in
the stack.
To configure each server in a stack

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Stacking item.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the resulting window (below), enter:

– The Stacking method (Dynamic or Static)
– The Stack Name (all servers use the same stack name)
– The Node ID for the specific server you are configuring. This should be a two-digit
number that will become the first two digits of users’ conference access codes.
Note: Zero (0) is not a valid Node ID for a server in a stack. If six-digit access codes
which use one digit for the Node ID are to be used, the application servers are limited
to Node IDs one (1) to nine (9). This results in a maximum of nine (9) application
servers (primaries and secondaries) in a stack. Because media servers do not store
conferences, you can still have up to 99 of them in a stack even though six digit Access
Codes are specified.
If using remote sites which are bridged together using PSTN, enter the telephone
number (Stack Phone for Remote Sites) used by remote OmniTouch ACS sites to
bridge together distributed conferences (the phone number other sites call to bridge
their servers to this site’s servers).
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Select whether this server is to be an Application Server, a Media Server, or both. See
the OmniTouch My Teamwork Unified Conferencing and Collaboration Application Site
Preparation Guide for a complete explanation of Application and Media Servers.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-77
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-40 Stack Parameters – Dynamic
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-78 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-41 Stack Parameters – Static
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-79
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click Save.
The server will now reboot in its new configuration.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
Note: When multiple servers are configured as a stack, the System Administrator’s
home page will show the names of the servers in the stack. To select which server you
want to administer, click the name of that server. For example, in the screen below,
the system administrator is logged into dev08.dev.edial.office (the server name is in
black, on a white background). To switch to dev07.dev.edial.office or
dev05.dev.edial.office, you must click that server’s name. It will change to black on a
white background, reflecting the fact that you are now administering it.
Figure 2-42 Servers in a Stack
Note: To access the stack alias in a stack, set the Cluster FQDN to the stack alias
and the Cluster IP Address for the group of stacked servers. The response order of the
servers is dependant on System Configuration. (see “Domains” (p. 2-39))
You should also choose a single name that will allow access to any of the servers in a stack.
This is the Server FQDN in the administration interface.
SSL certificates are given out by IP address. In order to avoid server name and certificate
name mismatches, each server is configured with two IP addresses:
• A specific server address
• A cluster server address
The DNS server should map the specific server name (for example,
alcatel1.company.com) onto the specific server address. In addition, the DNS server
should map the cluster server name onto all of the cluster server addresses. Users access
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-80 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Data replication
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
the server stack using the cluster server name. The browser will then access one machine
from the list of IP addresses returned by the DNS server. If that machine does not respond,
the browser will continue to try IP addresses until a machine responds.
Data replication
Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch Advanced Communications Servers support automated
failover within a stack to provide high availability. This is done by designating a Secondary
server to be a synchronized backup to its respective Primary server. For a thorough
explanation of Data Replication, see the OmniTouch My Teamwork Unified
Conferencing and Collaboration Application Site Preparation Guide.
The Data Replication feature applies to pairs of Application Servers (Redundancy Pair)
within a stack. Before enabling Data Replication, you MUST configure the Redundancy
Pair as a stack through Configuration–>Stacking (see Stacking). Replication occurs
within a stack, not between remote sites.You must have one Primary and one Secondary
Application Server per stack to take advantage of the Data Replication feature. Under
normal conditions, users should only be provisioned on the Primary Application Server,
but may be provisioned on the Secondary in the case where the Primary server is
unavailable.
Once enabled, replication occurs continuously in near real-time over the stack backplane.
The information is unencrypted. If you re-configure the stack at any time to disable Data
Replication, the secondary server’s database should be cleared before it is re-enabled.
Replication works best if, once enabled, it is left enabled at all times.
Important! If you add any customization to the Default Organization (for example,
custom prompts used as the Default prompt set), that customization needs to also be
be transferred to the secondary. If not, the replication process to the secondary will fail
due to the missing item.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-81
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To configure a server to be a Primary
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To configure a server to be a Primary

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Data Replication item.

The Data Replication page appears.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the Primary radio button.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Enter the host name of the intended Secondary server (Database backup server), and its
Node ID in the stack (see Stacking).
Figure 2-43 Data Replication – Primary
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-82 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To configure a server to be a Secondary
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click Save.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
To configure a server to be a Secondary

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The Data Replication screen appears.
Figure 2-44 Data Replication – Secondary
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the Secondary radio button.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-83
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To clear the Secondary server’s database in preparation
for synchronization
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Enter the host name (Database backup server) of the intended Primary server, and its
Node ID in the stack (see Stacking).
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click Save.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
To clear the Secondary server’s database in preparation for

synchronization
Disable (uncheck) the Enable Data Replication box in the Configuration Data
Replication screen PRIOR to bringing a new primary or secondary server online into an
existing stack configuration. This will clear any existing information in the replication
queue of the server that is currently online and it will freeze replication.
In the same screen you used to set the server as Secondary, go to the bottom section, and
click the Clear button.
Figure 2-45 Clear Database
To initiate synchronization between the Primary and

Secondary servers’ databases
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the Enable Data Replication box for the Primary and click the Save button.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check the Enable Data Replication box for the Secondary and click the Save button.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-84 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To initiate synchronization between the Primary and
Secondary servers’ databases
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the same screen you used to set the server as Primary, go to the middle section, follow
the instructions shown there, and click the Replicate button.
Figure 2-46 Replicate
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 To determine the current status of data replication in configured systems, access the Data
Replication page under Monitoring (see Viewing data replication).
a. Click the Monitoring tab.
b. Click the Data Replication item.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-47 Monitoring Data Replication
Table 2-16 Data Replication State Definitions
State Definition
NOT CONNECTED Database replication is
not happening.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-85
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Disassembling an OmniTouch ACS stack
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
State Definition
IN PROGRESS Servers are trying to
establish database
replication.
CONNECTED Database replication is
working.
Disassembling an OmniTouch ACS stack

It may be necessary to remove individual OmniTouch ACS servers from a stack, or to
remove, replace, or reconfigure the Ethernet backplane. Because the stack is continuously
replicating the state between the primary and secondary servers, some caution should be
taken in removing servers. This section offers some guidelines.
At all times, the node IDs for all servers interconnected through a stack backplane (even if
stacking is disabled) MUST be unique. If servers are interconnected that have the same
node ID, duplicate users and/or conferences can result, as well as mis-routed traffic. This
situation may require hands-on intervention by support to remedy, and may even
necessitate clearing the stack’s database completely.
If for some reason you change a server’s node ID, be aware that all existing conference
access codes on the server become invalid (the node ID is the first two digits of the code).
Therefore, the database on both the secondary and primary application servers should be
cleared (see the Data Replication page).
Removing and adding pure media servers (as opposed to the primary or secondary
application servers) from the stack may be done at any time, while the stack is still
operating. PSTN trunks should first be quiescent (no activity) (see Trunk status). If the
stack is statically configured, make sure that the IP address is configured correctly when
the server is returned to the stack.
To disassemble a stack completely, change each server’s stack name. There is no need to
reconfigure node IDs, and the stack may be easily reassembled.
Data Replication is designed to operate continuously once it is enabled. If it is disabled at
any time, the secondary application server’s database should be cleared before replication
is re-enabled.
Either the primary Application Server or the secondary Application Server can be
removed from the stack at any time. If both are absent, no calls or IMs may be made and
system is nonfunctional.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-86 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Advanced settings
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Ethernet switch may be removed and replaced without restarting servers, as long as
the network configuration remains the same. The process will temporarily sever internal
communications within the stack, with predictable disturbances to replication and
conferences that span servers.
If the backplane topology changes (e.g. due to VLAN redesign), the stack may have to be
rebooted. Backplane topology changes should be done only when the stack is quiescent
(no activity).
Advanced settings
Selecting Advanced Settings opens a new menu on the left of the screen. When you are
done with the Advanced Settings, select one of the items at the top of the screen to
proceed. These settings represent infrequently used configurations or actions (the actions
are documented in Chapter 3). The Advanced Settings menu presents the following
choices.
Note: Not all may be enabled in your software version.

• Phone Formatting Rules
• Phone Number Display Filter
• Restart Servers (see Restart servers (restart OmniTouch ACS processes))
• Edit DAS Rules
• Configure SNMP
• Configure IM Archiving (if enabled in your software)
• Configure Alarm Server
• Configure External JavaScript URL
• Configure External Hosted Frame
• Configure Collaboration Subnet
• Configure Sendmail
• Configure Bonding
• Advanced Upgrade Options (see Advanced upgrade options)
• Construct Document Conversion VM
• Route Management
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-87
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Phone formatting rules
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Phone formatting rules

These settings are intended to allow extension dialing and customize the formatting of
phone numbers.
OmniTouch ACS allows extension dialing by preceding the dialed digit string with the
letter “x”. By entering the regular expression that defines the numbers to be considered
extensions, the need for the “x” is removed. In the example below, the user interface will
accept 3 to 5 digit extensions as valid numbers to attempt to dial.
Regular expressions are a flexible and powerful syntax for textual pattern matching and
replacement. They are commonly used in UNIX and Linux systems (for example, the grep
command) as well as in the Perl language. Numerous tutorials for using regular expressions
are available online.
To define extension numbers

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Advanced Settings item.

Another list of items appears.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click the Phone Formatting Rules item.

The Phone Formatting Rules dialog box appears.
Figure 2-48 Phone Formatting Rules
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-88 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Phone number display filter
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Enter the following fields.
Table 2-17 Phone Formatting Rules Fields

Extension Pattern Enter the regular expression that defines the
numbers to be considered as extensions.
Custom Formatting Pattern Enter the regular expression that will be used to
format numbers as they will appear in the end-
user interface.
Note: If you enter /’’/ (slash, single quote,
single quote, slash) in the Custom Formatting
Pattern, you will be able to easily delete users
and change user settings.
Custom Replacement String This represents the replacement section within
the regular expression in the Custom Formatting
Pattern. If a phone number matches the Custom
Formatting Pattern, it will be reformatted using
this string.
Note: The Custom Replacement String must
result in a fully formed IEEE phone number.
Pre-Configured Custom Rules US 7-Digit Dialing: This option automatically
fills in the Custom Formatting Pattern and
Custom Replacement String with a pattern that
allows 7-digit dialing in the United States.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click Save.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
For a description of regular expressions, see Edit DAS rules.
Phone number display filter

This field allows the system administrator to change the formatting and content of the way
telephone numbers are displayed within the user interface and on CDRs (reports).
The filter pattern is a “regular expression” that gets applied to a telephone number before
displaying it; it does not affect what numbers are dialed or saved. Regular expressions are a
flexible and powerful syntax for textual pattern matching and replacement. They are
commonly used in UNIX and Linux systems (for example, the grep command) as well as in
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-89
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To configure the way phone numbers are displayed
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
the Perl language. Numerous tutorials for using regular expressions are available online.
The Phone Number Display Filter uses the Perl regular expression parser; all parsers
support the basic operators generally used in Alcatel-Lucent filters.
The Filter pattern field requires that you enter a string to match telephone numbers; if a
match is made, then the portion of the phone number text preserved inside the search
buffer (the text which is matched by the pattern inside the parentheses) will be displayed.
Only one set of parentheses may be used. Everything that is matched outside of the
parentheses will be removed in the resulting number.
Example:
Initial Number +12657 +12657 +12657

Filter 2(6)5 265 3489
Displayed Number +167 +17 +12657
In systems that are configured to support SIP phones, a Display Filter can be used to
display numbers that are sip:{phonenumber}@ipaddress as {phonenumber}. The default
filter below (^\+x\(.*)) strips leading “+x” strings from phone numbers.
To configure the way phone numbers are displayed

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click the Phone Number Display Filter item.
Figure 2-49 Phone Number Display Filter
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-90 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Edit DAS rules
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Save.
Example:
To display sip:17818953635@192.168.10.22 as 17818953635, the system administrator
enters:
s ip : ([ \d \ -\ +] + )@ . *
This expression looks for ‘sip:’ followed by some combination of digits, ‘-’ and ‘+’ all of
which gets saved, followed by ‘@’ and anything else. In phone number displays, this all
gets replaced by the part that was saved.
Note: If you specify an illegal regular expression, some Report screens may get
HTML or XML errors when they attempt to display. If this happens, correct the filter
and retry the operation. No code or data is corrupted by illegally formatted Phone
Display Filters.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
Edit DAS rules

The OmniTouch Advanced Communications Server (ACS) can be configured with rules
to handle a broad range of call routing and dial plan requirements. These can be
configured to handle international dialing, calling PBX extensions, and sophisticated
handling of SIP call processing.
The call routing rules are called DAS rules. DAS rules are a set of up to 20 UNIX system
regular expressions that are applied to the user’s dialed digits. The rules are applied in
order, one after the other – the output of each rule is the input to the next one. The result
is used as the dialed digits to be processed by the Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch Advanced
Communication Server’s call processing engine.
Regular expressions are a flexible and powerful syntax for textual pattern matching and
replacement. They are commonly used in UNIX and Linux systems (for example, the grep
command) as well as in the Perl language. Numerous tutorials for using regular expressions
are available online.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-91
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To configure DAS rules
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-50 DAS Rules
These are the fields for the individual DAS rules. Sample rules are shown already filled in.
An explanation of these and other sample rules follows.
To configure DAS rules

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Enter the specific rules you want the server to follow in processing dialed digits or SIP
addresses.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Save.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-92 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Sample DAS rules
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 When you get the warning dialog box (below), click OK.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Clicking OK will disconnect all phone calls on the server at that time.
Figure 2-51 Explorer Warning
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Close your browser window.

END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
Sample DAS rules

The sample DAS rules shown perform the following functions.
Table 2-18 Sample DAS Rules
s/^\+1/1/ When a digit string starts with “+1”, it

substitutes just “1” (domestic US long
distance call).
s/^\+x10(\d\d)/178189536\1/ If the resulting string starts with “+x10”
followed by 2 digits (for four-digit
extension dialing where all extensions
start with 10), it substitutes the full
outward dial string 178189536
concatenated with the 2 digits for the
extension. This would be appropriate for
dialing a four digit extension through a
server that is connected directly to the
PSTN.
s/^\+/011/ If the resulting string starts with a “+”, it
substitutes “011” (international call).
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-93
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Sample DAS rules
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
s/^011011/011/ If the resulting string starts with 011011,

then the initial 011 is stripped.
s/^1666845(\d*)/\1@voipgw.company.com If the resulting string starts with the
string “1666845” followed by any digits
(for example, an extension), then the
result is an address comprising those
digits@voipgw.company.com (for
routing VoIP calls).
s/^\+x(.*)/\1@10.64.14.152:5070/ This causes an extension that is dialed
through the UI (indicated by x in the
DAS rule), to be routed to a gateway for
processing. In this case, there is a need to
have OmniTouch ACS send an INVITE
to port 5070, instead of the default port
5060.
s/^\+x?(\d{3,8})$/\1/ This allows for extension to extension
dialing through the DTMF interface in a
SIP configuration. The +x? allows for
either having the 1x or not, while the
number of digits retained is from 3 to 8.
(The default outbound SIP proxy is set
to the Alcatel-Lucent OmniPCX
Enterprise Office – OXE – IP address
and port.)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-94 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Configure SNMP
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure SNMP
OmniTouch ACS can be configured to generate alerts and other messages using the
SNMP protocol. When enabled, these alerts are sent in addition to the SMTP messages
that are automatically enabled for all deployments (System Options).
To configure the server to generate SNMP traps

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Configure SNMP.

The SNMP Settings dialog box appears.
Figure 2-52 SNMP Settings
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-95
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To configure the server to generate SNMP traps
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The settings are as follows:

SNMP Traps
Disable – This setting does not use SNMP for system monitoring. (default setting)
V2c – This setting uses SNMPv2 community. (no password needed)
V3 – This setting uses SNMPv3. (Authentication password needed)
SNMP Trap Host – The host name of the SNMP trap system. In all cases, the traps are
sent to the host specified as the “SNMP Trap Host.”
SNMP Engine Number – The authoritative (security) engine ID for SNMP v3 requests.
The engine number is specified in hex (for example, 0x0102030405). It is chosen by the
administrator, and must be the same on both the trap sending and trap receiving sides.
SNMP User – The SNMP v3 security name (uses MD5 authentication).
The SNMP security name is a text string without spaces. It is chosen by the administrator
and must be the same on both the trap sending and trap receiving sides.
SNMP Password – The SNMP v3 security pass phrase and privacy pass phrase.
The SNMP password is a text string without spaces. Both the trap sending and trap
receiving sides must be configured to use the same password for the specified user.
SNMP Monitoring
Disable – This setting does not use SNMP for system monitoring. (default setting)
V1/V2c – This setting uses either SNMPv1 or SNMPv2 community. (no password needed)
V3 – This setting uses SNMPv3. (Authentication password needed)
V3 w/Privacy – This setting uses SNMPv3 with privacy. (two passwords needed –
Authentication and Privacy)
SNMP System Location – This is an optional descriptive word or phrase supplied by the
user to aid in system location. The following special characters cannot be used:
" $ ' * < > ?| [ ] `
SNMP Community – This is the name used to identify devices and stations running
SNMP that belong to a specific community (group). This name is required when running
SNMP V1/V2c.
SNMP User – This is a single user who has rights to monitor network performance through
SNMP. If SNMPv3 is running, the user needs an Authentication password. If SNMPv3
w/privacy is running, the user needs an Authentication password and a Privacy password.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-96 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To configure the server to generate SNMP traps
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SNMP Auth Password – This is the SNMP v3 security pass phrase for authentication
(hashed using MD5). The SNMP Authentication password is a text string. Both the
Management Station and OmniTouch ACS must be configured to use the same password
for the specified user.
SNMP Privacy Password – This is the SNMP v3 security pass phrase for privacy
(encrypted). The SNMP Privacy password is a text string without spaces. Both the
Management Station and OmniTouch ACS must be configured to use the same password
for the specified user.
Note: Enter a new password to make a change; leave blank to keep existing value.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Enter the appropriate information to match your network configuration.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click Submit.
Appropriate provisioning must be done on the receiving side to enable receipt of these
traps.
Clicking the Download ZIP file of MIB files link downloads a zip file containing MIB files
for accessing the SNMP Agent in OmniTouch ACS.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-97
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Configure alarm server
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure alarm server

In OmniTouch ACS, Release 7.1.4, alarms and alerts are sent in three ways:
• SMTP (E-mail)
• SNMP (traps)
• Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch Unified Communications Alarm and Event Server
OmniTouch ACS alerts are sent to the OmniTouch Unified Communications alarm and
event server appropriately classified as either an alarm or an alert.
To enable OmniTouch ACS alerts to be sent to the UC alarm

and alert server
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Return to the Welcome Screen.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click the Configure Alarm Server item.
Figure 2-53 Configure Alarm Server
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Check Enable Alarm Server.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-98 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Configure collaboration subnet
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Enter the IP address and port where the messages are to be sent in the Alarm Server
Hostname and Alarm Server Port fields.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
Note: If the OmniTouch Unified Communications alarm server is unreachable,

alerts and alarms will remain in a queue on the OmniTouch ACS. Periodically, they
will be retransmitted to the OmniTouch Unified Communications alarm server until
the queue is emptied.
Configure collaboration subnet

This allows a change to the IP range if there is a conflict with the Local Network
environment where the subnet is installed.
To change the IP range

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click the Collaboration Subnet item.

The first three octets of a Subnet Address appear.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-99
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Configure sendmail
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-54 Subnet Setting
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Change the Subnet address (first three octets).

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click Save.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
Configure sendmail
This is used by customers who need to disable Sendmail functionality if it is not needed.
To disable sendmail
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click the Configure Sendmail item.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-100 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Configure bonding
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-55 Sendmail
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Check the Enable Sendmail check box.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click Save.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
Configure bonding
Interface Bonding allows you to change your network configuration from two separate
interfaces (eth0 and eth1) to a single combined interface (bond0). The first network
address uses bond0 and the second network address uses bond0:1. All packets for both IP
addresses go out through eth0 if it is up, or through eth1 if eth0 is down. In bonding mode,
DHCP is disabled. You must have appropriately configured the switches carrying the
network traffic.
Note: The MAC Address of eth0 is used for both interfaces.
Figure 2-56 Use Bonding
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-101
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Configure IM archiving
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure IM archiving
For deployments that support Alcatel-Lucent’s OmniTouch My Teamwork Instant
Messaging feature, IM’s (Instant Messages) may be archived for later retrieval and review.
Archives are stored off the Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch Advanced Communications
Server (ACS).
To enable IM archiving
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Navigate to the Welcome Screen.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click the Configure IM Archiving item.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Check the Enable off-box IM Archiving checkbox.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Enter the mailbox where you want the archives sent.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Click Save.
Figure 2-57 IM Archiving
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-102 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Construct Document Conversion VM
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Construct Document Conversion VM

OmniTouch ACS 7.1.4 is backwards compatible with prior versions of document sharing
virtual machines. When upgrading to this new release, your document converter will still
be valid.
Before you begin, you need:

• At least an hour to complete this procedure.
• A properly installed and configured OmniTouch ACS 7.1.4 system, licensed with a
valid OmniTouch ACS license.
• A valid VMware license installed on the OmniTouch ACS server.
• A Microsoft Windows XP Professional CD (Windows) and its associated product key.
• A Microsoft Office 2007 CD (Office) and its associated product key.
• Physical access to the OmniTouch ACS server and its CD/DVD drive.
• Web Administration access to the OmniTouch ACS server via a web browser on your
client workstation.
• TightVNC listener installed on your client workstation and access to TightVNC
listener through any installed firewalls.
Note: If you do not have TightVNC listener installed on your machine, you can use
one of the appropriate links at the bottom of the Construct Document Conversion
VM page (Download Tight VNC for Windows XP or Tight VNC for other OS’s) to
download and install the software and related instructions. Accept ALL defaults for
the Tight VNC installation.
Note: Although the ACS Web Administration allows concurrent multiple sessions
to be run from different computers, it is critical that you run this procedure using a
single browser and TightVNC listener on only one computer.
Summary of the steps:

1. Update and store the product keys on the OmniTouch ACS, using the Web
Administration interface on your client workstation.
2. Start a TightVNC session between the OmniTouch ACS and your client workstation.
3. Initialize a new VMware virtual machine on the OmniTouch ACS and automatically
install Windows XP Professional and Office 2007 on the virtual machine.
4. Install VMware tools on the virtual machine.
5. Copy a startup file to the virtual machine’s hard drive.
6. Activate Windows XP Professional and Office 2007.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-103
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To construct document conversion VM
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7. Reset the virtual machine’s hard drive settings to prevent additional changes to the
virtual hard drive.
8. Mark the installation as completed.
9. Test the new document sharing virtual machine.
To construct document conversion VM

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Update and store the product keys on the OmniTouch ACS, using the Web
Administration interface on your client workstation.
a. Access a web browser on your client workstation and log into the OmniTouch
ACS Web Administration interface
Select Configuration–>Advanced Settings–>Construct Document Conversion
VM.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-104 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-58 Document Conversion VM
b. Locate the box labeled Step 1: Enter Product Keys and enter the product keys for
your copies of Windows and Office. Click the Submit Keys button and the OK
button in the resulting dialog box.
c. After you submit the keys, the screen will refresh and the new values will appear in
the boxes referenced in step a.
Important! Make certain you accurately enter the keys. If errors are made, they will
impact the process later, requiring a restart of this procedure.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Start a TightVNC session between the OmniTouch ACS and your client workstation.
Note: You may need to set your client workstation’s firewall to allow VNC to
connect.
a. Start a VNC client listener on your client workstation.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-105
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
b. Locate the box labeled Step 2: Open VM Window on the Construction of

Document Conversion VM page. Enter the name or IP address of your client
workstation (VNC Client IP) and click the Open button.
c. Click the OK button in the resulting dialog box.
d. A TightVNC window (virtual machine) should appear. If you do not see a
TightVNC window, you
are not running a listener on your client workstation.
Or
have a firewall on your client workstation blocking the VNC connection.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Initialize a new VMware virtual machine on the OmniTouch ACS and automatically
install Windows XP Professional and Office 2007 on the virtual machine.
a. Insert your Windows CD into your OmniTouch ACS server CD/DVD drive.
b. Return to your client workstation and locate the box labeled Step 3: option A on
the Construct Document Conversion VM page on the Web Administration page.
c. Select the checkboxes labeled Initialize, Install Windows and Office, and Enable
Manual Activation.
d. Perform the following steps in quick succession.
i. Click the Start button on the Web Administration page and click OK in the
resulting dialog box.
ii. Immediately switch to the TightVNC window page.
Note: If there are errors, see Step iv below.

iii. A new VMware image should quickly appear – within 30 seconds. A window
reflecting activity on the virtual machine will appear within the new VMware
image.
iv. If you see errors, you may need to perform one of the following corrective
actions and start at step 3.c again.
A failure of the grab state – Cancel the warning dialog box to continue the
installation.
Insufficient virtual memory to start the virtual machine – Cancel the
warning dialog box and click the Power On button in the VMware window.
This operation may need to be repeated several times.
VMware window enters a loop where the hard disk options page appears
and is repeatedly closed – Wait for the loop to end – may take several
minutes. Close the VMware window (not TightVNC), and start at step 3.c
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-106 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
again. You will have to navigate back to the page from

Configuration–>Advanced Settings–>Construct Document Conversion
VM to start again.
e. You should see the Windows installation process begin and go through four phases:
i. A black screen where the Windows installation begins.
ii. A blue screen where all files are copied to the virtual machine.
iii. A graphical screen which shows the various steps – this shows a time estimate
in the lower left indicating how long the Windows installation may take.
iv. When the installation finishes, you may see the virtual machine automatically
reboot.
f. After the Windows installation completes, a Windows command prompt starts
running, which loops with repetitive ping statements. Change the focus on your
client workstation to the Web Administration page window. A message requests
that you “Insert Office 2007 CD”.
g. Remove the Windows CD from the OmniTouch ACS CD/DVD drive and insert
the Office CD.
h. Return to your client workstation and click the OK button in the dialog box in the
Web Administration page window. This starts the Office installation. The pinging
should stop within the TightVNC window and the Office setup program will start
within that window.
Note: The Web Administration window will indicate the VM Construction is

complete, and an ordinary Windows page will appear in the TightVNC window.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Install VMware tools on the virtual machine.

a. When the virtual machine finishes installing Office, make the TightVNC window
the active window.
b. Remove the Office CD from the OmniTouch ACS CD drive and return to your
client workstation.
c. In the TightVNC window on your client workstation, press the Alt-Ctrl keys to
release the mouse cursor.
d. In the menu at the top of the VMware window, select
VM–>Install VMware Tools... and select Typical for the type of install. Continue
the installation process to completion.
e. Reboot the Windows session, when requested. Do NOT reboot the ACS server.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Skip this step and proceed to Step 6, if installing US English.

Copy a startup file to the virtual machine’s hard drive.
a. From the Start button, select and open the My Computer icon.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-107
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
b. Navigate to the A:\ drive, and copy the file startup.bat. (not the shortcut file)
Figure 2-59 Location of startup.bat File
c. Change directories to your language’s equivalent of C:\Documents and

Settings\All Users\Start Menu\Programs\Startup\ and paste a copy of
A:\startup.bat file there. Do not paste a shortcut.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Activate Windows and Office.

a. Select Start->All Programs->Accessories–>System Tools->Activate Windows
and follow the instructions given. When completed, exit the program.
b. Select Start->All Programs->Accessories–>System Tools->Microsoft Office.
Start Word and follow the instructions given, selecting Internet activation. When
completed, exit the program.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Activate Windows and Office.

a. Select Start->All Programs->Accessories–>System Tools
->Activate Windows and follow the instructions given. When completed, exit the
program.
b. Select Start->All Programs->Microsoft Office. Start Word and follow the
instructions given, selecting Internet activation. When completed, exit the
program.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Reset the virtual machine’s hard drive settings to prevent additional changes to the virtual
hard drive.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-108 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
a. Shut down the Windows virtual machine by selecting

Start–>Turn Off Computer and click Turn Off.
Important! Do NOT use the VMware Power Off button.

b. After the virtual machine is off, double-click the Hard Disk line (under Devices).
c. Click the Advanced... button in the lower right corner.
d. Leave the Mode as Independent and select the Nonpersistent radio button so
changes made are discarded on Power Off.
e. Click OK on the Advanced Hard Disk Options page.
f. Click OK for the Virtual Machine Settings page.
g. Close the TightVNC window.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Mark the installation as completed.

a. Return to the Web Administration window on the client workstation. Select
Configuration–>Advanced Settings–>Construct Document Conversion VM.
b. Locate the box labeled Step 4: Complete or Cancel Document Conversion VM
Construction at the bottom of the page. Click the Complete button and click the
OK button in the resulting dialog box.
Note: If you forget step 9.b, parts of the Document Conversion system will not start
when OmniTouch ACS is powered on.
c. Select Configuration–>Shutdown and click the Restart button to restart the
server.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Test the new document sharing virtual machine.

When the server has rebooted, two tests should be performed.
a. Log into the Web Administration and select Monitoring–>Server Status. Make
certain both the VMware Status and the Watchdog Status are 0/green.
Note: It may take up to 5 minutes for the virtual machine to initialize to a ready
state. All servers and watchdogs should eventually become green.
b. Using Internet Explorer on any client workstation, log into OmniTouch ACS as a
user. Select Make a Presentation and share one of each of the supported type of
documents (Word, Excel, and Powerpoint).
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-109
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Route management
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Route management
You can manage call routing by constructing a table of network addresses that will filter
originating and terminating traffic into controlled segments. This is most useful when
managing multiple remote sites of stacked servers.
The Routing table consists of the following fields.
Table 2-19 Routing Table Information

Destination Net This is the IP Address (Network ID and Host
ID) of the server that is not on the same local or
directly connected network as the server trying
to make contact.
Net Mask This mask divides the Destination Net IP
address into subnets specifying the available
servers associated with the Destination Net.
(Example: 255.255.255.0)
Gateway This is the IP address of the router that routes
traffic from a server to an outside network.
Figure 2-60 Route Management
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-110 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Removing static routes
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Removing static routes

If you need to revise your network’s static routes, you can delete your static routing table
through the Serial Administration console. Selecting the Remove all static routes item
deletes the Static Routes Table and restarts networking without static routes. You can
then make changes and save them through Configuration–>Advanced Settings–>Route
Management in the Web Administration console.
Figure 2-61 Remove All Static Routes
Edit TPDAS rules

You can configure Trunk Routing rules to have control over which PSTN trunk a specific
call, or calls, will go out on. To access the TPDAS interface, you must enter the following
URL in your browser:
h tt p s: // < se rv e r> / cg i- b in /t p da s ru le s .c gi
These are the fields for the individual TPDAS rules. Sample rules are shown already filled
in.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-111
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Sample TPDAS Rules
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-62 TPDAS Rules
Sample TPDAS Rules

The sample TPDAS rules shown perform the following functions as listed in this table.
Table 2-20 Sample TPDAS Rules
s/^\+17812225555/T1/ Sends this number out Trunk 1.

s/^\+17813335555/T2/ Sends this number out Trunk 2.
s/^\+1978(.*)/T1/ Sends all numbers that start with
1-978 out Trunk 1.
AMDS (Automated Message Delivery System) settings

AMDS can be used to automatically deliver pre-recorded voice messages to lists of target
recipients (Broadcast Lists). The application is intended to deliver messages overnight to
recipients’ voice mail. Not all systems are configured with this option, so this may not
apply to your system.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-112 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To configure the settings of the Automated Message
Delivery System
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To configure the settings of the Automated Message

Delivery System
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Automated Message Delivery Settings item.

The Automated Message Delivery Settings page appears.
Figure 2-63 Automated Message Delivery
The settings are described in the following table.
Table 2-21 AMDS Settings

Enable Checking this enables the Automated Message
Delivery capability and makes it accessible to
users who are designated ‘AMDS users (see
Manage user settings).
Max Ports This sets the maximum number of DS0s (Digital
Signal, Level 0) on the server that can be
accessed by the Automated Message Delivery
System capability. If conferences are expected to
take place at the same time as messages are
being delivered, you will want to set this number
below the maximum number of server ports, or
conference users may find all ports occupied by
outgoing messages.
Maximum Retry Count This sets the maximum number of retries
allowed for delivery of a message.
Retry Delay Time This sets the time allowed (in seconds) between
retries of a message delivery.
Logging Level 1=default; 2=debug; 3=trace.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-113
November 20, 2008

System Configuration Connector settings
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Default Session Duration This sets the default duration, in minutes, of a

broadcast session, if a valid stop time is not
specified.
API format Allows specification of an API that permits
integration of the Automated Message Delivery
capability into other enterprise applications,
such as sales force automation tools. Contact
your sales representative for additional
information on this capability.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter the appropriate information for your configuration.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Submit.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
Note: For more information about AMDS, refer to the Automated Message
Delivery System Administration Guide and the Automated Message Delivery System
Site Preparation Guide.
Connector settings
Enhanced Collaboration Service (ECS) allows licensed users to view the phone presence
(for example, “on the phone”) of other licensed ECS users.
To access ECS settings

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Connector Settings item.

The Add ECS Service/Agent, List Services/Agents, and Modify Trusted Hosts items
appear on the left of the screen.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-114 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To access ECS settings
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-64 ECS Items
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Add ECS Service/Agent to add a new Agent or Service per Domain. For each
Agent added, you must also add an associated Service (Agent/Service pair).
Figure 2-65 Add ECS Service/Agent
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-115
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To access the list of all ECS Services and Agents
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The settings are described in the following table.
Table 2-22 ECS Service/Agent Settings

URI This is the location of the Agent or Service.
Domain Select a Domain from the drop-down list of all
the available Domains.
Type Select Agent or Service from the drop-down
list.
Description You can enter a pertinent text description in this
optional field.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
To access the list of all ECS Services and Agents

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click the List ECS Services/Agents item.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 You can delete a Service or Agent from the list by marking it in the Delete column and
clicking the Delete button.
Figure 2-66 List ECS Services and Agents
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-116 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To modify the ECS Host IP address
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To modify the ECS Host IP address

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click Modify Trusted Hosts.

The Variable Name cannot be edited.
Figure 2-67 Modify ECS Host IP Address
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Value field, you can concatenate multiple IP Addresses, separating each by a
comma with no space before or after it.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click the Set button when finished.

END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 2-117
November 20, 2008

System Configuration To modify the ECS Host IP address
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-118 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Overview
Purpose
The items documented in this chapter all perform immediate actions on the server. They
are available from the Configuration menu.
Contents
This chapter discusses the following topics and procedures.
Topics:
Manual server backup 3-2
Manual server restore 3-4

Restoring an Alliance server 3-5
Restoring after replacement of the Primary server 3-8
Restoring a standalone server 3-21
Advanced upgrade options 3-27
Restart servers (restart OmniTouch ACS processes) 3-28
Procedures:
To set data to be backed up 3-2
To correct Ethernet mapping 3-5

To restore configuration settings on the new Primary server 3-9
To replicate the database from the Secondary to Primary server 3-12
To restore after replacement of the Secondary server 3-14
To install the Secondary server 3-15
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 3-1
November 20, 2008

Management Actions Manual server backup
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To replicate the database from the Primary to the Secondary server 3-19
To shutdown the server 3-25
To upgrade server software 3-26
Manual server backup

Periodic backup of server data is strongly recommended. Should the server suffer a
catastrophic failure and need to be replaced, the backed up data can be restored to a new
server so system configuration data, user data, CDRs, call schedules, access codes, etc. are
retained. Backups comprise both data (conference schedules, authorized users, and more),
and server configuration (IP addresses, server SSL certificate, and more).
User data and server configuration information can be backed up manually or
automatically (see Automatic server backup). In the case of manual backups, this screen is
used to identify the data elements that you want to back up.
To set data to be backed up

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Manual Server Backup item.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Backup User Data screen, selecting Push backup files to another machine
activates the fields and automatically fills in the defaults from Automatic Server Backup,
if it is enabled. (see Automatic server backup) This default backup information can be
edited
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Select the items you want to have backed up.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Enter the Backup Chunk Size in MB.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-2 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Management Actions To set data to be backed up
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The minimum size for backup chunks is 1 MB. Alcatel-Lucent recommends
using the largest sizes permitted for backup. The recommended range is 128 MB to
1024 MB.
Figure 3-1 Manual Server Backup
Push Backup files to another machine Check this box to send backup files to another
server.
Destination Host This is the server where backed up files will
reside.
Destination Directory This is the directory on the Destination Host
where the backed up files will reside.
Backup User ID This is the valid identity of the user on the
Destination Host.
Backup User ID Password This is the password associated with the Backup
User ID.
Accept new or changed certificates If checked, all changed and new SCP certificates
will be accepted.
Use SCP Use SCP (Secure Copy Program) to copy files
between the ACS server and the Destination
Host. Passwords will be needed for
authentication.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 3-3
November 20, 2008

Management Actions Manual server restore
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use non-secure FTP Use non-secure FTP (File Transfer Program) to

copy files between the ACS server and the
Destination Host. Authentication is not
required.
Backup Chunk Size in MB This is used to break up a large file into smaller
(up to 1024 MB) file chunks for file transfer.
Verify Settings To verify your settings are correct, click this
button. A panel listing the verification progress
and results appears. If you receive no error
messages, click Save.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click Save.
After clicking Save, you will be presented with a browser dialog box asking where on your
local machine or network you want to save the resulting md5 file.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
Manual server restore

A system backup can only be restored to a system running the exact software revision that
was in use when the backup was created.
Note: The restoration process is destructive. This means all existing user data and
configuration settings will be deleted and replaced with the contents of the backup file.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-4 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Management Actions Restoring an Alliance server
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-2 Manual Server Restore
Before a system can be restored, it must be properly licensed. If restoration starts with a
scratch install, your license must be reapplied using the licensing page before restoring a
saved system.
Restoring an Alliance server

If you are replacing your server with an Alliance system or are fully restoring an existing
Alliance system (for example, due to replacement of an Ethernet card), an unwanted
Ethernet interface name swap may take place.
To correct Ethernet mapping

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Log into the Serial Administration console on the new server.

Username: admin
Password: changeme
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 3-5
November 20, 2008

Management Actions To correct Ethernet mapping
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-3 Manage Ethernet Interface Name
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Ethernet–>Manage Ethernet interface names.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select OK. The Swap Ethernet Interface screen appears.
Figure 3-4 Ethernet Name Swap
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Select Yes.
The swap does not take place until the server is restarted.
You will receive a warning message:
Changes will not take effect until restarted.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-6 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Management Actions To correct Ethernet mapping
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Select Restart–>Restart Server.
Figure 3-5 Restart Server
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Select OK. The Restart Alcatel-Lucent Server screen appears.
Figure 3-6 Restart Alcatel-Lucent Server
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Select Yes for the swap to take place.

All current calls will be lost.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 3-7
November 20, 2008

Management Actions Restoring after replacement of the Primary server
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Restoring after replacement of the Primary server

This procedure assumes that a stacked system has been in operation for a while, and
regularly scheduled backups have been made. It also assumes that replacement of the
Primary server is required, and while the Primary is down, normal operation has been
taken over by the Secondary server.
There are three procedures that must be performed:
• Initial installation of the Primary
• Restoration of the configuration settings on the Primary
• Replication of the database from the Secondary to the Primary
To install the Primary server

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Disable replication on the Secondary server:

a. Click the Configuration tab.
b. Click the Database Replication item.
c. Uncheck the Enable Replication box.
d. Click the Save button.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Replace the old Primary server with the new Primary server.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Disconnect the Primary server from the backplane (for example, unplug eth1 cable).
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Scratch install the New Primary server to the same software revision as the one used for
the most recent backup. (Refer to the OmniTouch My Teamwork Unified Conferencing
and Collaboration Application Installation Guide for installation procedures.)
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-8 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Management Actions To restore configuration settings on the new Primary
server
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To restore configuration settings on the new Primary server

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Log into the Serial Administration console on the New Primary server:
Username: admin
Password: changeme
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Configure any required networking information.

a. Select Networking Configuration.
b. Use DHCP appears. Select Yes or No and press Enter.
c. Configure your Network appropriately.
d. Reboot the server.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Log into the Web Administration page on the Primary server and upload the license
obtained when the system was purchased.
b. Click the Licensing item.
c. Locate the license file by using the Browse button.
d. Click the Upload button.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 3-9
November 20, 2008

server
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-7 Upload License on Primary
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Restore the Primary server’s configuration.

b. Click the Manual Server Restore item.
c. Click the Browse button to locate the *.md5 file from the latest backup of the
Primary.
d. Click the Restore button.
e. Click the OK button in the resulting message dialog box.
f. In the Files that need to be uploaded box, click the Browse button to select the
*a* files from the latest backup of the Primary.
Note: There may be multiple files with the following sequential extensions: *.aa,
*.ab, *.ac, etc. The filenames will appear on the Administration page. You must locate
(using the Browse button) and upload each individual file.
g. After all files are uploaded, the server automatically restores, and after restoration,
the system will reboot.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Log into the Serial Administration console again, on the new Primary server:
Username: admin
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-10 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

server
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Password: changeme
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Log into the Web Administration console on the Primary server and upload any licenses
e. You need to provide and upload your own VMware license, if you are licensed for
Application Sharing.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Verify/change any TCP/IP settings.

b. Click the TCP/IP Settings item.
c. After data is verified or changed, click the Save button.
Note: You must click SAVE, even if no data was changed because this page must be
saved for complete restoration to take place.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Configure E-mail appropriately.

a. Click Configuration.
b. Click the System Options item.
c. Configure E-mail settings.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 3-11
November 20, 2008

Management Actions To replicate the database from the Secondary to
Primary server
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To replicate the database from the Secondary to Primary

server
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Log into the Web Administration page on the Primary Server.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click the Database Replication item.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Uncheck the Enable Replication box.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Verify the accuracy of the Primary’s configuration and Secondary’s configuration.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Clear the Primary’s database by clicking the Clear button on the Database Replication
page.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-12 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Management Actions To replicate the database from the Secondary to
Primary server
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-8 Check Primary Server Configuration
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Wait for the server to reboot and log into the Web Administration page again.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Re-enable replication on the Secondary server.

c. Check the Enable Replication box.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Replicate the database from the Secondary to the Primary. Make certain, you are on the
Secondary server.
c. Click the Replicate button.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 3-13
November 20, 2008

Management Actions To restore after replacement of the Secondary server
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 While on the Secondary, select the Monitoring tab.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Click the Data Replication item and wait for messages to be queued.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Enable replication on the new Primary.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 While on the Primary, select the Monitoring tab.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Click the Data Replication item and wait for both Primary and Secondary to be in the
Connected state.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 After a few minutes (dependant on database size), the Primary Queued list will change to
Done and the system will be ready for use.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
To restore after replacement of the Secondary server

This procedure assumes that a stacked system has been in operation for a while, and
regularly scheduled backups have been made.
There are three procedures that must be performed:
• Initial installation of the Secondary
• Restoration of the configuration settings on the Secondary
• Replication of the database from the Primary to the Secondary
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-14 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Management Actions To install the Secondary server
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To install the Secondary server

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Disable replication on the Primary server:

c. Uncheck the Enable Replication box.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Replace the old Secondary server with the new Secondary server.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Disconnect the Secondary server from the backplane (for example, unplug eth1 cable).
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Scratch install the New Secondary server to the same software revision as the one used for
the most recent backup. (Refer to the My Teamwork Unified Conferencing and
Collaboration Application Installation Guide for installation procedures.)
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
To restore configuration settings on the new Secondary

server
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Log into the Serial Administration console on the new Secondary server:
Username: admin
Password: changeme
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Configure any required Networking information.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 3-15
November 20, 2008

Management Actions To restore configuration settings on the new Secondary
server
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Log into the Web Administration page on the Secondary server and upload the license
Figure 3-9 Upload License on Secondary
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Restore the Secondary server’s configuration.

Secondary.
*.a* files from the latest backup of the Secondary.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-16 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

server
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
*.ab, *.ac, etc. The filenames will appear on the Administration screen. You must
locate (by using the Browse button) and upload each individual file.
After all files are uploaded, the server automatically restores, and after restoration, the
system will reboot.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Log into the Serial Administration console again, on the New Secondary server:
Username: admin
Password: changeme
Figure 3-10 Serial Console
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

b. Select the Configure TCP/IP network parameter item.
c. Use DHCP appears. Select Yes or No and press Enter.
Figure 3-11 Use DHCP
d. Configure your network appropriately.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 3-17
November 20, 2008

server
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
e. Reboot the server.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Log into the Web Administration page on the Secondary server and upload any licenses
e. Upload the VMware license you obtained, if this option was chosen.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-18 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Management Actions To replicate the database from the Primary to the
Secondary server
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To replicate the database from the Primary to the Secondary

server
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Log into the Web Administration page on the Secondary server.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click the Database Replication item.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Uncheck the Enable Replication box.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Verify the accuracy of the Secondary’s configuration and Primary’s configuration.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Clear the Secondary’s database by clicking the Clear button on the Database Replication
page.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 3-19
November 20, 2008

Management Actions To replicate the database from the Primary to the
Secondary server
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-12 Check Secondary Server Configuration
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Wait for the server to reboot and log into the Web Administration page again.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Re-enable replication on the Primary server.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Replicate the database from the Primary to the Secondary. Make certain you are on the
Primary server.
c. Click the Replicate button.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-20 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Management Actions Restoring a standalone server
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 While on the Primary, select the Monitoring tab.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Click the Data Replication item and wait for messages to be queued.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Enable replication on the new Secondary.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 While on the Secondary, select the Monitoring tab.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Click the Data Replication item and wait for both Secondary and Primary to be in the
Connected state.
After a few minutes (dependant on database size), the Secondary Queued list will change
to Done and the system will be ready for use.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
Restoring a standalone server

There are two procedures that must be performed:
• Initial installation of the Standalone server
• Restoration of the configuration settings on the new server
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 3-21
November 20, 2008

Management Actions To install the standalone server
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To install the standalone server

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Replace the old server with the new server.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Scratch install the new server to the same software revision as the one used for the most
recent backup. (Refer to the My Teamwork Unified Conferencing and Collaboration
Application Installation Guide for installation procedures.)
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
To restore configuration settings on the new server

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 After the installation of the server is complete and server reboots, log into the Serial
Administration console:
Username: admin
Password: changeme
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-22 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Management Actions To restore configuration settings on the new server
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

d. Configure your Network appropriately.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Log into the Web Administration page on the server and upload the license obtained
when the system was purchased.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Restore the server’s configuration.

server.
*.a* files from the latest backup of the server.
*.ab, *.ac, etc. The file names will appear on the Administration screen. You must
locate (by using the Browse button) and upload each individual file.
After all files are uploaded, the server automatically restores, and after restoration, the
system will reboot.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 3-23
November 20, 2008

Management Actions To restore configuration settings on the new server
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Log into the Serial Administration Console again.

Username: admin
Password: changeme
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

d. Configure your Network appropriately.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Log into the Web Administration page and upload any licenses obtained when the system
was purchased.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-24 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Management Actions To shutdown the server
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

e. You must locate and upload your own VMware license if you are licensed for
Application Sharing.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reboot the server.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
To shutdown the server

This function allows the Administrator to gracefully shut down ACS.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Shutdown item.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 3-25
November 20, 2008

Management Actions To upgrade server software
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click the shutdown method (Restart or Power Off).
Note: The shutdown will start immediately, terminating any calls or activities in
progress.
Figure 3-17 Shut Down System
Note: Clicking on the Restart button will perform a full reboot of the Alcatel-
Lucent Advanced Communications Server. The server loses contact with your browser
session during the reboot – therefore, you must invoke and log into OmniTouch ACS’s
Administration application after the restart has completed in order to check its status.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
To upgrade server software

OmniTouch ACS supports online upgrades of the server software. Upgrades are typically
done only to install new releases of OmniTouch ACS software.
Upgrades can be done remotely, or locally by using an upgrade CD or DVD. To perform an
upgrade, you will need to know the location of the upgrade file. Your customer support
representative can help you identify the correct file to use and its location.
Note: Starting with Release 7.0, OmniTouch ACS will only be offered on the Red
Hat Enterprise 4.0 (RHE4) platform. OmniTouch ACS systems that contain TDM
Network Interface TP240 Modules cannot be upgraded to OmniTouch ACS 7.0 or 7.1
or 7.1.x because there is no driver support for the TP240 card in RHE4. If you want to
upgrade to ACS 7.0 or 7.1 or 7.1.x, replace the TP240 card with a TP260 which is
available from Alcatel-Lucent, or switch to the IP trunking interface (for example,
SIP).
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-26 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Management Actions Advanced upgrade options
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-18 Upgrade Server Software
Note: If an Install button appears under the Action column, the associated upgrade
file has yet to be installed.
For a local upgrade:

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click the Browse button in the Upload Install Image From Local File box.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the upgrade file you want to apply to your system.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click the Upload button.

Once the upgrade process has started (including the upload of the upgrade file), do not
perform any other functions with your browser (or close your browser window) until the
upgrade is complete. Your browser window will reflect the state of the upgrade process,
letting you know when it is complete.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
Advanced upgrade options

You can upgrade from a CD or a DVD. Auxiliary components provided by third-party
Alcatel-Lucent partners may also be updated from a CD ISO image file.
Advanced upgrades can be done by uploading and installing the upgrade ISO file, or
installing from the CD or DVD.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 3-27
November 20, 2008

Management Actions Restart servers (restart OmniTouch ACS processes)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Applying the upgrade will terminate calls in progress.
Figure 3-19 Upgrade Software Using CD or DVD
Restart servers (restart OmniTouch ACS processes)

This option is available through the Advanced Settings screen in the Configuration
menu.
For specific maintenance purposes, it may be necessary to restart specific server software
processes. This screen allows you to select which processes to restart.
Important! Restarting services can interrupt calls and other user features. It is
strongly recommended that you restart processes only under the direction of your
customer support representative.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-28 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-20 Restart Servers
Table 3-1 Server Processes

BBMUX This service restarts the multiplexer that
handles multiple streams of communication
between services.
ICS This service restarts My Teamwork.
IVR This service restarts the Interactive Voice
Response system (voice prompts).
THS This service handles SIP messages between
clients and the OmniTouch ACS server.
TNS This service handles proposing and scheduling
of SIP messages to be sent to the TP Driver.
TP Driver This handles communications with a PBX
phone system.
Desktop MCU This provides the capability of multiple systems
to participate in a multipoint conference
(Application Sharing).
SNMP This handles sending of alerts/alarms that
monitor network devices for abnormal
conditions.
UPG This restarts the OmniTouch ACS web server.
Mobile Gateway This restarts OmniTouch My Teamwork for
Windows Mobile 5 Pocket PC.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 3-29
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MS LCS Gateway This restarts OmniTouch My Teamwork for

Microsoft Office Communicator 2005.
Document Conversion Server This restarts the service that converts
documents into presentations.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-30 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

4 Provisioning and
Account Management
Overview
Purpose
The chapter describes the provisioning of organizations and the settings that apply to
users.
Contents
This chapter covers the following topics and procedures.
Topics:
Organizations 4-3
Provisioning organizations 4-4
Assigning text translations 4-10
Editing phones 4-11
Default user settings for organizations 4-13
Default user preferences for organizations 4-17

Manage user settings 4-28
Manage user preferences 4-34
IP audio/video preferences 4-38
View scheduled conferences 4-39
View Call Detail Report 4-42
Schedule a reservationless conference 4-47
Manage delegates 4-48
Password policy 4-49
Call blocking 4-50
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-1
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Bulk provision/modify user accounts 4-54

Parameter action formats 4-56
Supported bulk provision parameters 4-57
Possible bulk provisioning messages 4-63
Bulk provision reservationless conferences 4-67
Export user data 4-68
Import user data 4-69
Delete user data 4-71
Download reservationless conferences 4-72
Add Administrator user 4-73
List Administrators 4-74
Change Administrator password 4-75
Find a user in a stack 4-76
Procedures:
To create organizations 4-4
To provision organizations 4-5
To add individual user accounts 4-20
To provision for Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch Land Mobile Radio Conferencing 4-22

and Collaboration (LMRCC)
To access a list of users 4-25
To locate a user through Search 4-27
To modify or delete user accounts 4-27
To view a user’s scheduled conferences 4-40

To generate a call report for a particular user 4-42
To schedule a user’s reservationless conference 4-47
To add a delegate for a user 4-48
To set password requirements for an Organization 4-49
To configure call blocking for an organization 4-52
To test a call blocking rule 4-53
To bulk provision users 4-54
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-2 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management Organizations
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To download all users’ reservationless access code sets 4-72

To add a system administrator 4-73
To see what users have system administration rights 4-74
To change the Adminstrator’s password 4-75
To find a user 4-76
Organizations
The Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch Advanced Communications Server (ACS) allows
multiple Organizations with their own sets of dial-in telephone numbers to be hosted (see
LDAP configuration (Authentication and Auto Provisioning)) on a single system. Users
are assigned to Organizations. Organizations can have as few as a single user assigned.
User accounts on OmniTouch ACS contain specific information needed to use the
system. When a user is initially provisioned, most parameters are set to system defaults, but
the system administrator can subsequently change specific settings for individual users, as
described below.
Note: Provisioning can be done either directly on OmniTouch ACS, or through

LDAP queries to a corporate directory. The following sections describe the process for
setting users up locally in the Alcatel-Lucent server’s database. To use LDAP, see
LDAP configuration (Authentication and Auto Provisioning).
Organization and user management is provided through functions available under the
Provisioning tab on the Screen.
Figure 4-1 Provisioning Screen
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-3
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management Provisioning organizations
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisioning organizations
The first step in provisioning an OmniTouch ACS is to provision the Organizations to
various Domains that will be using the system. The server comes preconfigured with one
Organization – the DEFAULT organization. For most OmniTouch ACS deployments, the
DEFAULT organization is the only organization that is needed.
Note: The DEFAULT Organization cannot be deleted. It will remain even if you
rename it. Additional Organizations, subsequently created, can be deleted. If an
Organization is deleted, users assigned to that Organization automatically get
reassigned to the DEFAULT organization. To delete users, see To modify or delete
user accounts.
To create organizations
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click the Provisioning tab.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Organizations item.

The Create New Organization dialog box appears below the list of existing
Organizations.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select a Domain from the drop-down list.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Enter a name for the Organization.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click Add.
The new Organization is added to the List of Organizations.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-4 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management To provision organizations
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-2 Create New Organization
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
To provision organizations
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Organizations item.

The List of Organizations screen appears.
Figure 4-3 Organization List Screen
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Edit in the Settings column.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-5
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-4 Edit Organization Screen
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-6 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 After completing the following fields, click the Update button.

The fields are defined as follows:
Table 4-1 Organization Settings

Name The name of the selected organization. You can
change the name.
Domain The Domain that the organization is associated
with. You can change the associated Domain, by
selecting from the drop-down list.
Default Prompt Set A drop-down list where a prompt set is selected
for an organization. The Voice Prompt Set
language for an organization may differ from the
Web Interface language for that same
organization.
Default Caller ID The caller ID presented on outgoing calls from
the organization’s users.
Always use Default Caller ID If checked, the organization’s default caller ID
will always be presented on outgoing calls from
the organization’s users. If you do not check this
field, the following will happen:
When User A is the first person to join an
adhoc, scheduled, or reservationless conference,
that user will see the configured Default
Caller ID.
If User A then calls User B, User B will see the
phone number of User A as the Caller ID.
If each additional person joins the conference by
call-back, They will see User A’s Caller ID.
OR
If User A starts a call by clicking on User B
contact, or by entering a number in the My
Teamwork Call box, User A will see the
Default Caller ID. User B will see the phone
number of User A.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-7
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Restrict Users to Organization Conferences for an organization can only be

accessed by users who are members of that
organization.When this is selected, users in
other organizations cannot see (that is,
presence, Instant Messaging, and other
operations related to user ID) the users who are
in the restricted organization.
Restrict Access Codes to Organization Conferences scheduled by users who are
Phone Numbers members of an organization can only be
accessed when calling that organization’s phone
number (defined above in Default Caller ID).
Note: The Port Limit fields will only be available for editing if the Allocate Audio Ports per
Organization item is selected (checked) on the Configuration –> System Options page.
Port Limit for this Organization This is the maximum number of ports that this
organization is allowed to use for conferences.
Scheduled Conference Port Limits (Ports) If checked, port limits for Scheduled
conferences are enabled and the maximum
number of ports allowed for these types of
conferences can be set.
Adhoc/Reservationless Conference Port If checked, port limits for
Limits (Ports) Adhoc/Reservationless conferences are enabled
and the maximum number of ports allowed for
these types of conferences can be set.
Music On Hold If checked, Music On Hold is enabled and a
Music On Hold file can be selected from the
drop-down list. (Music On Hold files should be
stored in a 8 Kb/s, 8 bit, monophonic mu-law
.wav file format.)
Disk Quota (MB) If checked, the Disk Quota for this specific
organization is enabled and the maximum quota
in MB can be set.
Max Audio Legs Per Call This is used to limit the number of audio legs
that can be included in a single conference.
(maximum 400)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-8 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Max AppSharing Legs Per Call This is the maximum number of application
sharing legs that can be included in a single
conference. (maximum 200)
Note: AppSharing uses ActiveX controls to
execute VNC Server and VNC Viewer (client).
These ActiveX Controls (CSess Object which is
the server component; CvncViewer Object
which is the client component) get downloaded,
and then installed as objects embedded into
Internet Explorer and Windows Registry. This
only works on Windows machines running
Internet Explorer.
Important! Sufficient rights need to be
granted to install and run the ActiveX
components on the target machine.
Single Leg Timeout (seconds) This is the length of time after which a single leg
(lone phone connection) into a conference is
terminated. This is to prevent users from dialing
into a conference with no other participants and
forgetting to hang up or needlessly occupying
server resources. The default is 3600 seconds
(one hour), generally enough for someone to
dial into a conference and wait for others to
join.
Document Timeout This is the length of time that uploaded
(hours, minutes, days) documents will remain on the OmniTouch ACS
after a call has expired. Although document
timeout (expiration time) may be specified in
minutes, the check is only run hourly, so that
documents may persist for up to an hour longer
than expected.
Enable Operator Assist Checking this enables users to seek assistance
when problems arise dialing in to or during
conference calls in this organization.
Note: After three bad dialing attempts, the
user is given the option to press 0 to speak with
an operator. During a call, the user may press
##0 (pound pound zero) or, if configured, 00
(zero zero) to request operator assistance. In
both cases, the users are placed in a queue
associated with the organization of the owner of
the conference. The user remains in the queue
until an operator answers, or the user hangs up.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-9
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management Assigning text translations
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Operator Queue This is a drop-down list of all Operator Assist

Queues associated with this specific
organization.
Many Operators may monitor the same Queue.
Users are processed on a first-in-first-out (FIFO)
basis.
The dial-in number that is configured here will
be visible in various parts of the end-user
browser interface as well as being automatically
included in the E-mail invitations to scheduled
conference calls. Telephone numbers defined for
organizations should be unique, particularly if
organizations have their own voice prompt sets.
If the telephone numbers for two organizations
are the same, the system will randomly pick one
of their voice prompt sets to play.
Assigning text translations

This is the list of text Translation Sets available to an organization.
Table 4-2 Text Translation Settings

Name This is the name associated with a specific set of
translated interface text.
Language This is the language associated with a specific
set of translated interface text.
Action A specific set of translated text associated with
an organization may be deleted or edited.
Translation Set (language) This is a drop-down list that contains the
Translation sets that may be added to those
associated with an organization.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-10 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management Editing phones
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Editing phones
In this page, the Administrator can configure up to 16 phone numbers per organization.
This page is accessed through Provisioning–>Organizations.
Figure 4-5 Edit Phones
Table 4-3 Phone Settings: Organization

Phone Number This is the list of telephone numbers assigned to
an organization that users can dial to join
conferences. These can be DID (toll) telephone
numbers or toll free numbers (for example, an
800# telephone number).
Label for Email Invitation This is the label associated with the telephone
number. You may type any descriptive text here.
The Label appears on the Conference Invite.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-11
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management Editing phones
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Language This drop-down list contains all of the languages

available to this organization. A different
prompt set may be configured for each phone
number allowing a single Organization to offer
multiple prompt sets.
When upgrading from a pre-7.1.x ACS system,
an existing Organization’s phone numbers will
be set to the existing Prompt set for that
Organization.
Toll-Free Any configured phone numbers may be
optionally marked as toll-free. This is a
requirement for integration with third-party
systems such as Microsoft Office Communicator
or IBM Lotus Sametime which require toll-free
numbers to be distinguished from other
numbers.
Include in Email Invitations Checking this box allows the phone number and
its associated label to appear in Email and
Calendar invitations.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-12 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management Default user settings for organizations
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Default user settings for organizations

When initially provisioned, all users are given the same set of user settings and privileges
(Default Organization Settings). The system administrator can set the defaults applied
to all users who are subsequently provisioned within an organization.
Figure 4-6 Default User Settings for Organzation
If the defaults are changed, click the Save Changes button. Users who were provisioned
before the change do not have their settings changed. To restore all users to the new
system defaults, click the Save and Apply Settings to All Users button. Any individual
settings that differ from the defaults will need to be reapplied.
Note: If at any time, you need to restore the original system defaults, click the
Restore to System Defaults button.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-13
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following settings can be made.
Table 4-4 Default User Settings

Require password change at next login If checked, users must change their passwords at
the next login to OmniTouch ACS.
Reservationless Calls There are three options:
• Reservationless calls allowed, leader not
required.
• Reservationless calls allowed, leader
required.
• Reservationless calls not allowed.
Maximum Length of Reservationless and This determines the length of time in weeks
Recurring Conferences before a Reservationless or Recurring
conference expires. The default is 26 weeks.
Note: A conference is “expired” if its
scheduled end time has passed. A
reservationless conference does not expire until
its entire authorized period is expired. A
recurring conference does not expire until the
last of its series of calls has expired.
Note: If the user is a My Teamwork for IBM
Lotus Sametime user, the maximum length of
conferences needs to be set on the Sametime
Domino server to match what is set on the ACS
server. To limit the number of days a meeting
can be scheduled in advance, the following
needs to be enabled in the notes.ini file. This
example uses 10 days.
;Notes.ini
STScheduleLimitDays=10
This setting also applies to repeating meetings.
Repeating meetings cannot be scheduled past
the number of days in this setting.
For the above parameters to take effect, the
Sametime Domino server must be restarted after
the changes are made.
Dial Out Allowed If checked, the user can dial out to other
OmniTouch ACS users.
Deny Multiple Leaders If checked, multiple callers using the leader
access code are not allowed on conference calls.
Allow file attachments If checked, a file can be attached and shared
within an IM session.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-14 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Allow application sharing If checked, an application can be shared within

an IM session.
Disk Quota enabled If checked, this allows users within an
organization to store data on the OmniTouch
ACS server (for example, recordings of
conferences; documents that are uploaded into
conferences as presentations or attachments).
Note: Recording requires approximately 8000 bytes per second
(480 kilobyte per minute or 0.5 MB/minute). When you are recording a presentation with audio,
an insignificant amount of space is needed for the presentation because a history of time stamps is
recorded for each appearance of a slide. (A single copy of each slide that was presented is made;
no matter how many times the same slide appeared.)
Example:
For a Powerpoint presentation, each page requires between 65 and 75 kbytes/page, If the
Powerpoint presentation contained 10 pages, regardless of how many times each slide appeared
during the session, the presentation would consume between 650 and 750 kbytes/page. The audio
consumption would be added to this amount to yield the total space needed.
Disk Quota (MB) This is the maximum amount of disk space
available for storage on the OmniTouch ACS
server for users within an organization.
Video Allowed If checked, the user has access to video
functionality
Note: This option will only be available if
Video has been purchased.
Lock Video MCU Settings If checked, the user may view their MCU
settings, but not change them. (Pre-configured
by the Administrator.)
Lock Video Client Settings If checked, the user may view their video
settings on the Video Client Options page, but
not change them. (Pre-configured by the
Administrator.)
Require Project Code If checked, the user is required to enter a Project
Code (text string) when scheduling a
conference.
Require Department Code If checked, the user is required to enter a
Department Code (text string) when scheduling
a conference.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-15
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Allow conference auto-extend If checked, this allows the end time of a

scheduled conference to be extended
automatically if there are ports available.
Note: There is no limit to the number of times
that a conference may be extended if there are
available ports. An audio prompt will be played
notifying the participants that the conference is
about to end. (May be configured from one to
five minutes before the end of the call.)
Call Barring Rule You can select a rule from the drop-down list to
apply to an organization’s users restricting them
from making specific calls.
Contact Search Allowed If checked, the user may search the database of
users in their Domain.
Mobile Gateway User If checked, the user may log into My Teamwork
Mobile Edition.
Sametime Conferencing Allowed If checked, the user may schedule IBM Lotus
Sametime usable conferences with access to My
Teamwork features.
MOC Conferencing Allowed If checked, the user may schedule MOC
(Microsoft Office Live Communicator) usable
conferences with access to My Teamwork
features.
AMDS User If checked, the user has access to the
Automated Message Broadcast interface.
Note: This option will only be available if the
Automated Message Delivery System has been
purchased.
AMDS ports This is the maximum number of ports allowed
for broadcasting messages.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-16 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management Default user preferences for organizations
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Default user preferences for organizations

The system administrator can set the defaults applied to all users who are provisioned in an
organization. If the defaults are changed, users who were provisioned before the change do
not have their settings changed.
Figure 4-7 Default User Preferences for Organization
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-17
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-5 Default User PreferencesCreating/Adding User Accounts

Web Interface Language This sets the translation language for the Web
Browser interface.
Default status after sign-in This sets the user’s status to one of the following
when that user signs on to the system:
• Online
• Away
• Be Right Back
• Busy
• Custom
• Offline
• On the Phone
• Out to Lunch
Change Status to “Away” after This sets the user’s status to Away after a
selectable period of inactivity on the user’s PC,
up to 60 minutes. Other users will see this user’s
status as Away after that period of time. This
can also be set to never set the user’s status to
Away (“Do not change Status”).
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-18 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Email Invitation Format There are five choices.

• Create a verbose style email: Provides
longer, more complete conference
information in users’ email invitations.
(Compatible with email clients that can
handle longer preloaded messages through
html “mailto” hyper-links, such as Microsoft
Outlook.)
• Do not create emails: Does not allow
user to create emails.
• Send email text via Lotus Notes: Loads
an ActiveX control which sends mail
through Lotus Notes. You must have Lotus
Notes installed on your system.
• Create a short email message: Provides
less detail in users’ email invitations.
(Compatible with email clients that require
shorter preloaded “mailto” messages.)
• Pop up a window with the email
text: Provides longer, more complete
conference information and instructions in
a popup window. (Compatible with email
clients that do not support the short format.
This format will be automatically selected if
the user’s language settings prohibit the use
of body tags in mailto: URLs.)
Note: When selected, this popup option also
allows a user to click the Open email
message button within My Teamwork and
copy and paste conference details into an email
message. This may be used when mailto is not
effectively working.
Current Contacts View There are four choices.
• No filtering – show all contacts
(Default)
• Filter out blocked contacts
• Filter out offline, blocked contacts
• Filter out offline contacts
Block IM when status is “Busy” This setting prevents IM pop-ups from being
received when the user’s status is set to “Busy”.
This acts as an IM “do not disturb” setting.
Show phone state when “offline” If checked, this allows others to see phone state
when an IM presence is offline.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-19
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management To add individual user accounts
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Send IM when “Enter” is pressed If checked, an IM is sent each time the user
presses the Enter key. If unchecked, the Enter
key starts a new line in an IM, and the user
clicks the Send button to send the IM.
Play sound when IM is received If checked, the user’s PC will play a sound to
signify the arrival of a new IM. If unchecked, no
sound is played.
Auto-accept new buddy requests If checked, requests by other users to add the
user as a buddy (contact) will be automatically
accepted. If unchecked, the user will be
presented the option to accept or decline the
request.
Auto-add to my Contact list If checked, when the user is added to another
user’s Contact (buddies) list, that other user is
automatically added to this user’s Contact list. If
left unchecked, the user must manually add
each member on their Contact list. This option
is only available if the Auto-accept option is
checked.
Allow others to expand window to view If checked, this allows Users to expand the
shared material shared application window to view shared
material in its entirety without any clipping.
Do not allow Conversation Window in This is checked, by default. It prevents the
front of shared application Conversation pop-up window from obscuring
any portion of an actively shared application.
Create Conversation Window for two- This is checked, by default. If you do not want a
party calls window to pop-up on your screen for only two-
party calls, uncheck this box.
To add individual user accounts

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click the Add User item.

The New User screen appears.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-20 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management To add individual user accounts
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-8 Adding User
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Enter a user name for the user you are adding (65 characters max).
The Username is used as the login ID for OmniTouch ACS. OmniTouch ACS User
names must be formatted like E-mail addresses: <name>@<domain.ext>. However,
the system does not use the User name as an E-mail address unless requested to (for
example, if an OmniTouch ACS User right-clicks on a user name and chooses E-mail).
If you will never request E-mail to be sent to a user, the specified name@domain.ext
need not even be a valid E-mail address. The domain.ext should not be all numeric;
specifically, it must not be an IP address.
The optional registered telephone number is the user’s phone number where
OmniTouch ACS can call the user to join that user into a call. The user can
subsequently change this number through the end user’s web user interface, allowing
the user to be called wherever he or she happens to be.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Enter a password for the new user.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Enter the new user’s telephone number.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Select the user’s Organization from the drop-down list.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Enter a description of this user (optional).

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Click the Create User button.

A screen will appear to confirm that the new user has been added to the system.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-21
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management To provision for Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch Land Mobile
Radio Conferencing and Collaboration (LMRCC)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-9 New User Confirmation
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
To provision for Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch Land Mobile

Users can be provisioned to interface with radio equipment and paging devices.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Follow the instructions within the device documentation to configure it and register it as
an endpoint. (for example, the Raytheon JPS ARA-1 Radio-to-SIP Interface and the
WiPath ACU2000 Paging Alarm System)
Note: If you are using an Alcatel-Lucent Omni PCX Enterprise (OXE) or SIP
registrar, the endpoint is not the My Teamwork server.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Create a user that points to the ARA (or ACU2000) at its SIP URI or registered phone
number.
Figure 4-10 Adding an Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch Land Mobile Radio

Conferencing and Collaboration (LMRCC) User
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-22 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 When the user is successfully created, you can configure settings for this user in the User
Settings page. (Provisioning->Search User->Manage User Settings)
Figure 4-11 Manage LMRCC User Settings
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-23
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Add the user to any Contact lists.
Figure 4-12 LMRCC Contact
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 You can then place calls to this user using the same method you would use to place calls to
any other My Teamwork contact.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-24 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management To access a list of users
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-13 Click-to-Call LMRCC User
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
To access a list of users

Note: You may also link to this page through Provisioning–>Organizations. (see
Provisioning organizations)
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the List Users item.

A screen will appear that shows all of the currently configured users for this organization.
They will be listed in the table as shown below with their OmniTouch ACS user name and
description (if any).
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-25
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management To access a list of users
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-14 User List
Clicking on a particular user will bring up the modify user screen

(see Figure 4-15 View Options).
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-26 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management To locate a user through Search
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To locate a user through Search

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Enter all or part of a user name in the Search text box.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the organization to be searched from the drop-down list. (You can also search all
organizations.)
Note: You can also check the Disk usage for a specific user (or all users) using the
Search functionality.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Submit.
All user names that contain the substring you entered will appear in a list format.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
To modify or delete user accounts

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Find the user.(see To access a list of users)

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the user’s name to access the screen that allows access to that particular user’s
account.
Figure 4-15 View Options
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click the setting you want to view or modify.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-27
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management Manage user settings
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
These options are described in more detail in the following sections.

END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
Manage user settings

Click Manage User Settings as shown in Figure 4-15This selection will present the
following screen, which will allow you to view and modify a user’s profile:
Figure 4-16 Manage User Settings
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-28 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-6 User Settings

New Password The password the user will use to access the
OmniTouch My Teamwork web interface.
Require password change at next login If checked, the user must change the password
at the next login to OmniTouch ACS (My
Teamwork).
Organization The Organization the user is assigned to.
User Description Optional text description of this user.
LCS SIP URI This is the SIP Address for the user if Microsoft
Office Communicator/Live Communication
Server is used for audio and video conferencing.
Registered Phone This is the telephone number of the user that
the Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch Advanced
Communications Server (ACS) will call when
calling out to that user’s ID.
Manage Phone Numbers This link leads to a page where you can add
telephone numbers to the list of numbers
available to this user for dialing to join
conferences. You can also delete numbers from
the list. These numbers may be either toll or toll
free telephone numbers. Only one can be
designated as the user’s registered phone.
Note: When a + (plus) is entered at the beginning of a number, the number is taken
literally and not reformatted.
Example:
+1-7815552255 will NOT become +1-781-555-2255.
It will remain +1-7815552255
If Presence Monitored (PBX Presence) is selected, the Phone Type is always Admin.
However, you do not need Presence monitoring enabled to select an Admin phone type.
Selecting the Admin phone type only allows an Administrator to make changes to the
phone number (Phone No.), Label, Registered phone, and PBX presence monitoring,
The Administrator can also add or delete phone numbers from the list. If the phone type is
Admin, a user is only allowed to change the Registered phone designation through the
My Teamwork client.
If a phone number is a User phone type, the Administrator can make all changes to the list
of phone numbers, and the User can, through the My Teamwork Client, change the
Phone number, Label, and Registered phone designation. The user can also add or
delete a phone number with a User type designation through the My Teamwork client.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-29
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: PBX Presence Monitoring requires an Enhanced Communication Service

(ECS) license.
Figure 4-17 Manage Phone Numbers
Note: To add an additional empty row, click the Add button. To save new or
revised information, click the Save button.
Billing Extension This is the optionally defined “Billing

Extension” for each OmniTouch ACS User. In
Release 7.1 or later, this will only be used when
placing calls through an Alcatel-Lucent
OmniPCX Enterprise (OXE) SIP gateway. In the
4760 Configuration interface, this is referred to
as the Directory Name or Extension. (May
also be referred to as QMCDU.)
Note: Both System-wide and Organizational Administrators are allowed to modify
the following value.
Reservationless calls There are three options:
not required. – The user may schedule a
reservationless conference and has the
option of allowing a call to begin without
the leader having joined the call.
required. – The user may schedule a
reservationless conference, but those calls
cannot begin until a leader has joined the
conference.
• Reservationless calls not allowed. –
The user may only schedule one-time and
recurring conference calls.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-30 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Maximum Length of Reservationless and This determines the length of time in weeks
Recurring Conferences (Weeks) before a Reservationless or Recurring
conference expires.
Note: A conference is “expired” if its
scheduled end time has passed. A
reservationless conference does not expire until
its entire authorized period has expired. A
recurring conference does not expire until the
last of its series of calls has expired.
Deny multiple leaders If checked, multiple callers using the leader
access code are not allowed on conference calls.
Dial out allowed If checked, the user can dial out to others using
OmniTouch ACS.
Allow file attachments A file can be attached and shared within an IM
session.
Allow application sharing An application can be shared within an IM
session.
Disk Quota Enabled If checked, the Disk Quota Enabled
checkbox limits a user’s disk usage using the
limit specified in the Disk Quota field. If this
box is not checked, the disk usage for a user is
unlimited.
Disk quota (MB) This is the maximum amount of disk space
available for storage on the OmniTouch ACS
server for this user.
Video Allowed If checked, the user has access to video
functionality. This will only appear if Video is
enabled (licensed).
Lock Video MCU Settings If checked, the user may view their MCU
settings, but not change them. (Pre-configured
by the Administrator.)
Lock Video Client Settings If checked, the user may view their video
settings on the Video Client Options page,
but not change them. (Pre-configured by the
Administrator.)
Require Project Code If checked, the user is required to enter a Project
Code (text string) when scheduling a
conference.
Require Department Code If checked, the user is required to enter a
Department Code (text string) when scheduling
a conference.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-31
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Allow conference auto-extend This allows the end time of a scheduled

conference to be extended automatically, if
there are ports available.
There is no limit to the number of times that a
conference may be extended, if there are
available ports. An audio prompt will be played
notifying the participants that the conference is
about to end. (The prompt may be configured to
play from one to five minutes before the end of
the call.)
Call Barring Rule You can select a rule from the drop-down list to
apply to an organization’s users restricting them
from making specific types of calls.
Contact Search Allowed If checked, the user may search the database of
users in their Domain.
Mobile Gateway User If checked, the user may log into the My
Teamwork Mobile Edition.
MOC Conferencing Allowed If checked, the user may schedule MOC
(Microsoft Office Live Communicator) usable
conferences.
Sametme Conferencing Allowed If checked, the user may schedule Sametime
conferences.
Client Connector This box only needs to be checked for one user
per Domain to enable a connection (bridge) to
the Sametime client for all Sametime users
within that Domain. That user, along with
other Sametime users in the Domain, must
also have Sametime Conferencing
Allowed enabled (checked).
Operator If checked, the user may provide assistance to
other users when they attempt to dial-in to a
conference or during a conference.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-32 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Operators may only service the operator queue that is defined for their organization.
More than one Operator can monitor the same queue. Users are processed on a first-in first-out
basis (FIFO). After a user has 3 bad attempts dialing into a conference, the user is given the
option to press 0 (zero) to speak with an operator. During a call, a user can press ##0 (pound-
pound-zero) to request operator assistance. The operator views and manages requests for
assistance through the Operator Console which is a 1-page web application. Through this console,
an Operator can:
• Sign-In/Sign-out
• Select the next person in the queue and speak with that person
• Disconnect the person from the system (hang up)
• Place the person on hold
• Mute the person
• Transfer the person back to the call they were in before speaking with the operator
• Search the conference database for a conference by owner (wild card supported),
date/time range, conference name, project, and department
• Transfer the person into a conference/call
• View and manage the legs of a running conference/call
Operator Conference ID This is the ID of the Queue that is assigned to
this Operator.
AMDS User, AMDS Ports User has access to the Automated Message
Delivery System interface (see AMDS
(Automated Message Delivery System)
settings). This feature will only be available to
customers who have purchased and enabled the
AMDS application.
When the settings for a user account are completed or revised, click the Save Changes
button.
A user account may be deleted by clicking the Delete User button.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-33
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management Manage user preferences
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Manage user preferences

Click Manage User Preferences as shown in Figure 4-15 The following page allows the
System Administrator to set appropriate configurations for My Teamwork users. The end-
user can also change these settings in the My Teamwork Client interface.
Figure 4-18 User Preferences
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-34 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-7 User Preferences

Display Name This is the name other users associate with
Instant Messages (IMs) received from this user.
Web Interface Language This sets the translation language for the Web
Browser interface.
Default status after sign-in Sets the user’s status to one of the following
when that user signs onto the system:
• Online
• Be right back
• Busy
• Custom
• Offline
• Away
• On the phone
• Out to lunch
Change Status to “Away” after Sets the user’s status to “Away” after a selectable
period of inactivity on the user’s PC, up to 60
minutes. Other users will see this user’s status as
“Away” after that period of time. This can also
be set to never set the user’s status to “Away”.
This feature depends upon an ActiveX control
which will be automatically installed when the
Administrator enables this option.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-35
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E-mail Invitation Format There are five choices:

• Create a verbose style email – Provides
longer, more complete conference
information in users’ E-mail invitations.
(Compatible with E-mail clients that can
handle longer preloaded messages using
html “mailto” hyper-links, such as Microsoft
Outlook.)
• Do not create emails – The user is not
allowed to send E-mail invitations.
• Send email text via Lotus Notes –
Loads an ActiveX control which sends mail
through Lotus Notes. You must have Lotus
Notes installed on your system.
• Create a short email message –
Provides less detail in users’ E-mail
invitations. (Compatible with E-mail clients
that require shorter preloaded “mailto”
messages, such as Lotus Notes.)
• Pop up a window with the email text
– Provides longer, more complete
conference information and instructions in
a pop-up window. (Compatible with E-mail
clients that do not support the short format.
This format will be automatically selected if
the user’s language settings prohibit the use
of body tags in mailto: URLs.)
Note: When selected, this popup option also
allows a user to click the Open email
message button within My Teamwork and
copy and paste conference details into an email
message. This may be used when mailto is not
effectively working
Current Contacts View There are four choices:
• No filtering – show all contacts (Default).
• Filter out blocked contacts.
• Filter out offline, blocked contacts.
• Filter out offline contacts.
Block IM when status is Busy This setting prevents IM pop-ups from being
received when the user’s status is set to “Busy”.
This acts as an IM “do not disturb” setting.
Show phone state when “offline” If checked, this allows others to see a user’s
phone state when an IM presence is offline.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-36 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Send IM when “Enter” is pressed If checked, then an IM is sent each time the user
presses the Enter key. If unchecked, the Enter
key starts a new line in an IM, and the user
clicks on the Send button to send the IM.
Play sound when IM is received If checked, then this user’s PC will play a brief
sound to signify the arrival of a new IM. If
unchecked, no sound is played.
Auto-accept new buddy requests If checked, requests by other users to add this
user as a buddy (contact) will be automatically
accepted. If unchecked, this user will be
presented with the option to accept or decline
the request.
Auto-add to my Contact list If checked, when the user is added to another
user’s Contact (buddies) list, then that other
user is automatically added to this user’s
Contact list. If unchecked, the user must
manually add each member to the contact list.
Note: This option is only available if the
Auto-accept option is checked.
Allow others to expand window to view If checked, this allows users to expand the
shared material shared application window to view shared
material in its entirety without any clipping.
Do not allow Conversation Window in This is checked, by default. It prevents the
front of shared application Conversation pop-up window from obscuring
any portion of an actively shared application.
Create Conversation Window for two- This is checked, by default. If you do not want a
party calls window to pop-up on your screen for only two-
party calls, uncheck this box.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-37
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management IP audio/video preferences
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IP audio/video preferences
Video Endpoint This is how to reach a user’s video client. Just a user can be contacted
through a phone number, a video user has a video endpoint for video
conferencing.
There are three ways to connect to another user:
Table 4-8 Connecting to Another User
SIP SIP:SIP Address (for example, SIP:pat@alcatel-

lucent.com)
H323 There are two ways to connect using H323:
H323:IP address
(for example, H323:129.168.10.1)
H323:Registered H323Name
(for example, H323:pat,where pat is registered with the
gatekeeper)
ISDN ISDN:Telephone Number
(for example, ISDN:16175555567)
Use video endpoint for audio in Check this if your video endpoint device has a
video calls microphone.
Use internal video client Check this if you want your video to appear in
the console window. ActiveX is required to run
the internal video client.
Important! The My Teamwork internal
video client will not run on Windows Vista™
using any browser.
Use Automatic Video Configuration Check this if your network does not require a
Registrar/Proxy server for video conferencing.
Do not select Automatic Video
Configuration if your system administrator
has provided you with network configuration
information for your video settings. In this case,
use manual configuration.
Note: Your system may require that
Automatic Video Configuration only be
used on the network where the My Teamwork
server is installed.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-38 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management View scheduled conferences
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Auto answer Check this if you want the video camera to

automatically turn on when you receive a call.
Username This is dependant on the SIP Registrar/SIP
Proxy.
Password This is dependant on the SIP Registrar/SIP
Proxy.
SIP Registrar This is required when SIP IP endpoints (built-in
audio or video) will be used.
SIP Proxy If the video endpoint must work across network
boundaries, a SIP Proxy may be required.
Realm This is the video server.
Transport SIP Registrar or SIP Proxy dependant. There are
three choices:
• UDP
• TCP
• TLS
Authentication SIP Registrar or SIP Proxy dependant. There are
four choices:
• None
• Digest
• Basic
• NTLM
View scheduled conferences

This selection allows you to view a list of the user’s scheduled conferences, including date,
time, and access codes. The list will include one-time, recurring, and reservationless
conferences that will begin or end during the specified date range. You can also view
recorded conferences that took place within the selected date range.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-39
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management To view a user’s scheduled conferences
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To view a user’s scheduled conferences

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click View Scheduled Conferences. (Figure 4-15)

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the dates you are interested in from the calendar dialog boxes.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the radio button associated with either Conferences or Recordings.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click View.
Figure 4-19 View Scheduled Conferences
The result is a table showing either the Scheduled Conferences or Recordings for that
user during that time period, including conference subjects, dates, times, access codes, and
billing and department codes, if any.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-40 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management To view a user’s scheduled conferences
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-20 Scheduled Conference Report Fields
Table 4-9 Scheduled Conference Report

Owner System user ID of the person who created the
conference.
Subject Conference Name/Description.
Leader Code Access Code used by the conference Leader to
join the conference.
Start Time Date and time when the conference leg was
joined. (MM/DD/YYYY; HH:MM:SS)
End Time Date and time when there was no longer anyone
joined to the conference leg.
Participant Code Access Code used by the conference Participant
to join the conference.
Is Leader Required Yes (Y) or No (N).
Billing Code A text string that may be needed for billing
purposes for a scheduled conference. (This may
be a Department Code or a Project Code. It may
also be a PBX extension that is used when
placing calls through an Alcatel-Lucent OXE
SIP gateway.)
Department Code A text string needed to schedule a conference.
(may be used for billing purposes)
Project Code A text string needed to schedule a conference.
Are Multiple Leaders Allowed Yes (Y) or No (N).
Reserved Ports This is the number of ports specified for the
conference.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-41
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management View Call Detail Report
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-21 Scheduled Recordings Report Fields
Table 4-10 Scheduled Recordings Report

Owner System user ID of the person who created the
conference.
Subject Conference Name/Description.
Access Code Code used to access the Recording.
Start Time Date and time when the recording started.
(MM/DD/YYYY; HH:MM:SS)
End Time Date and time when the recording ended.
Billing Code A text string that may be needed for billing
purposes for a scheduled conference/recording.
(This may be a Department Code or a Project
Code. It may also be a PBX extension that is
used when placing calls through an Alcatel-
Lucent OXE SIP gateway.)
Department Code A text string associated with the recording. (may
be used for billing purposes)
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
View Call Detail Report

All calls are logged by ACS and stored in a database (tableName ths_call).
To generate a call report for a particular user

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click View Call Detail Report. (Figure 4-15)

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the dates you are interested in from the calendar pop-ups.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-42 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management To generate a call report for a particular user
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-22 View Call Detail Report
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter a specific Project Code or Department Code if you want to filter the data based
upon those parameters.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Select a report format.

Web Report – Generates a report in a new web browser window.
CSV Report – Generates a comma separated values file that you can save to your
computer and open in spreadsheet programs.
XML Report – Generates a report that can be imported into applications that
understand XML.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click View.
If you choose a Web Report, the result will be a detailed table of all call legs for that user
including date, time, phone number, whether the call was incoming or outgoing, the
conference ID, which specific server it was on, and which trunk and channel it was on for
that server. (You will download a file, if you choose CSV Report or XML Report.)
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-11 Call Detail Report Fields

Call Date Date on which the first person joined the call.
Call Start Time Time when the first person joined the call.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-43
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Call Owner System user ID of the person who owns the call
that this leg participates in.
For scheduled and reservationless calls, the Call
Owner is the person who scheduled the
conference.
For ad-hoc calls, the Call Owner is the first
person who did one of the following:
• Uploaded a presentation
• Requested the dial-in number and access
code
• Clicked the Record button.
User ID of the person called when a user just dials a
phone number. When a number is dialed in, the
Call Owner and user appear as the same. When
a person is dialed by Name, the name becomes
the User ID. When a callback is initiated, a
temporary system ID is assigned (x.temp) and
the temporary ID becomes the User ID.
Phone The following will appear during:
• Incoming call: Caller ID (only appears if
Trunks provide Caller ID)
• Outgoing call: Number dialed (If blocked:
Blank, unknown, or private may appear)
• Recording: Name of recording (if
recording does not have a name, blank)
• Playback: Name of recording (access code
will be the access code of the recording)
• VoIP: SIP or IP address (e.g.,
sip:17818953635@192.168.10.22)
Direction Shows whether the call is incoming or outgoing.
Leg Start Date and time when a specific leg (person)
started. (MM/DD/YYYY; HH:MM:SS)
Duration Length of time in HH:MM:SS that a specific leg
(person) was joined to a call. (If rejoined
multiple times, multiple records will appear.)
Leg Number Unique number assigned to leg.
Access Code Automatically assigned and may be Participant
or Leader. (node ID is the first two digits of the
code)
Department Code A text string needed to schedule a conference.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-44 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Project Code A text string needed to schedule a conference.

Call ID Internal, unique ID for a specific call.
• Ad Hoc call: Each call generates a new
Call ID.
• Scheduled and Reservationless
Conference calls: Use same Call ID for
each access.
Note: Call IDs must not contain the @
character.
Called Number Incoming number dialed by user (DNIS: Dialed
Number Identification Service). Typically used
by Call Centers with different numbers for
different services.
Server In a single server configuration, the server name
will be the same on multiple calls; in a multi-
server configuration, the server name may be
different on multiple calls. (useful for
troubleshooting)
Trunk Number Only appears for systems with built-in gateway
cards. (0-7)
Channel Number Derived from a particular trunk; reported by the
Gateway card.
The number of actual channels per trunk is as
follows:
• T1 with PRI signaling – 23
• T1 with CAS – 24 (Note that Direct
Inward Dialing, DID, is supported.)
• E1 with PRI – 30
Leg Call ID Call ID of an audio leg for VoIP or call ID of part
of application sharing session if Leg Type is
AppShare or call ID of part of video session if
Leg Type is Video.
Leg Type Audio, Application Sharing, or Video.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-45
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Leg Attributes One or more of the following values separated

by a “-” (for example, adhoc-leader).
• adhoc: Not an access-coded call
• leader: Leg joined using a Leader access
code (may also be the originator in an adhoc
call)
• participant: Leg joined using a Participant
access code (may also be a user who is a
called party in an adhoc call)
• record: Leg used to record the call
• playback: Leg used to play back a
recording within a call
Message Count Total number of Instant Messages sent during a
session.
Organization Name of Organization call owner belongs to.
Domain Name of Domain where call owner's
Organization resides.
Billing Extension PBX extension charged for the call. (Only used
when placing calls through an Alcatel-Lucent
OXE SIP gateway.)
Audio Payload The audio codec used for each leg. If the codec
changes during a call, the final codec used for
the leg will be recorded. If ACS does not know
which codec was negotiated between end-
points, the requested or default audio codec will
be recorded.
Video Parameters The complete set of video parameters specified
by the call owner when scheduling the
conference. The set of values will vary
depending on the type of Video MCU
configured for the system.
The actual values used during a session may be
different. For example, if the user requests
H.264, but H.261 is negotiated, H.264 will be
recorded.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-46 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management Schedule a reservationless conference
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Schedule a reservationless conference

You may establish reservationless conferences for users of your system. This will enable
them to hold conferences at any time, without having to schedule them in advance, and
without having to use the end-user web interface.
You have the option of pre-defining the user’s leader and participant access codes. This
access code, which is given to participants dialing into the conference, must be 7 digits
long and start with ## where ## is the two digit Node ID. If the Node ID is a single digit,
then the number should begin with a zero (0).
To schedule a user’s reservationless conference

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click the Schedule a Reservationless Conference item. (Figure 4-15)

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Optionally, enter 7 digit leader, and/or participant access codes in the access code fields.
Figure 4-23 Scheduling a User’s Reservationless Conference
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click the Create button.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Record the resulting participant and leader access codes and inform the user.
If either access code you requested is already in use on the system, you will get an error
message that “th e ac ce s s c o de i s n o t a va i la b le .” In that case, try a different
code.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-47
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management Manage delegates
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Manage delegates
A delegate is a user who can view and change another user’s call schedule. Delegates are
often administrative assistants, but may be any registered user on the system.
To add a delegate for a user

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click Manage Delegates. (Figure 4-15).

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the resulting window, enter the Delegate’s username.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click the Assign button.

The List of Delegates appears with the newly added Delegate.
Figure 4-24 Assigning a Delegate
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-48 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management Password policy
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Password policy
Note: You may also link to this page through Provisioning–>Organiztions. (see
To set password requirements for an Organization

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Password Policy item.

The Password Policy page appears.
Figure 4-25 Password Policy
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select an Organization from the drop-down list.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Enter the Minimum Length of the password, if desired.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Set the requirement (in days) for a password change, if desired.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 You can also disallow use of previous passwords according to the number you set.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-49
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management Call blocking
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 You may also optionally require at least one of the following:

Uppercase (A…Z)
Lowercase (a…z)
Special character
Number (0…9)
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Click Set Policy.

END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
Call blocking
This feature is used to define Blocking Rules which specify phone numbers or patterns of
numbers that may not be dialed by particular users.
Note: You may also link to this page through Provisioning–>Organizations. (see
Blocking rules use the same syntax as OmniTouch ACS DAS rules. Each rule is comprised
of one or more Perl regular expressions. Each dialed number is evaluated against each sub-
expression within the rule. If the evaluation meets the criteria of each sub-expression up to
*/bar/, the call will be blocked.
The call blocking mechanism strips all characters out of a phone number except the
following:
0-9, x, X, +, #, *, and comma ( , )
The letter x represents an extension. Any 3 to 5 digit long number is considered an
extension and dialed as one (for example, 1234 becomes x1234).
The comma ( , ) is recognized as a pause in all phone numbers.
If your phone number begins with sip: no characters are stripped out of it.
A + (plus) is always added by the system to all non-sip and non-extension numbers if you
do not enter it while dialing. If a number begins with 011, it will be converted to a +011. If
+011 is entered, it will remain as +011. The system does not reformat any number when a
leading + is manually entered in a phone number.
When a number is typed in and tested against a rule, the returned number that appears in
the Type a phone number box is the actual number being tested.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-50 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management Call blocking
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Once you create a blocking rule, you can apply it to a user through that user’s User
Settings Page.
Table 4-12 Sample Rules With Blocking Results
Number Dialed Blocking Result

+011-123-444-5555 +0111234445555 is a valid number.
Note: Starting any number The dashes were stripped.
with a +011 leaves the International prefixes are configured in System Options
number unchanged. (see To configure system options).
0111234445555 +1234445555 is a valid number.
+country code phone number.
+1-617-234-5555 +16172345555 is a valid number.
1-617-234-5555
6172345555
1(617)234-5555
Note: For a US number to
be valid, the area code is
required. The number 1 will be
added by the system if the user
does not type it in.
The following examples present some typical blocking rules.
Note: Blocking rules are also applied to sip addresses. Using the “block calling to
international numbers from the US” example, a call to
sip:01133140302010@gateway-ip-address would also be blocked.
s/^\+*011\d*/bar/ Block calls to any number that begins (optionally) with +

and is followed by 011 and is followed by any number of
digits (international calls from the US)
s/^\+*1*212\d*/bar/ Block calls to any number that begins (optionally) with +
and is followed by 1 and 212 and is followed by any number
of digits (calls to New York)
s/^\+*011\d*/bar/\ns/^\+*1 Block calls to any number that begins (optionally) with +
*212\d*/bar/ and is followed by 011 and is followed by any number of
digits, and block calls to any number that begins
(optionally) with + and is followed by 1 and 212 and is
followed by any number of digits (international calls from
the US and calls to New York)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-51
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management To configure call blocking for an organization
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To configure call blocking for an organization

Note: You may access this page through Provisioning–>Organizations.
(see Provisioning organizations)
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Call Blocking item.

The Add/Edit a Rule page appears.
Figure 4-26 Add or Edit a Call Blocking Rule
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the Organization you want the rule to apply to.

If you want the rule to apply to all organizations in a Domain, check the Domain Rule
checkbox.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Type a meaningful name for the rule in the Name box.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Type a brief description of the rule in the Description box.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Type your Perl expressions in the Rule box.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-52 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management To test a call blocking rule
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The new rule will be added to the Call Blocking rules list where it can be edited or deleted,
if no longer needed.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-27 Call Blocking Rules List
To test a call blocking rule

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the rule from the Rule drop-down list.
Figure 4-28 Test a Call Blocking Rule
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Type the phone number to be tested.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-53
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management Bulk provision/modify user accounts
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click the Test rule button.

If the number will be blocked, the following appears:
“This number will be blocked.”
If the number will not be blocked, the following appears:
“This number will not be blocked.”
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
Bulk provision/modify user accounts

This feature is used to create multiple user accounts in a single step. The account
information is read from an ASCII text file that you prepare in advance.
To bulk provision users

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Bulk Provision Users item.

The Bulk Provision Users screen appears.
Figure 4-29 Bulk Provision Users
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click the Browse button to locate the text file with the user information.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-54 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management To bulk provision users
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Select the file.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Select whether or not passwords in the file are encrypted.
Note: This encryption is an Alcatel-Lucent proprietary encryption that is used to

protect user passwords when copying users from one My Teamwork server to another
My Teamwork server.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Select the Organization from the drop-down list.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Click Process File.

END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
The bulk provisioning file format contains each action represented by one line in the file.
Each line is of the following format:
action,user_name,[action specific parameters]
Parameters in brackets are optional, so the minimum information that should be in the
text file for each user is the action (add, update, change, delete), the user’s E-mail address
(User Name in the single-user provisioning screen) which becomes the user’s ID for
accessing the system, and an assigned password (which the user may subsequently
change).
Note: The User name/E-mail address can be up to 65 characters in length. The

system does not use the User name as an E-mail address unless requested to (for
example, if a My Teamwork User right-clicks on a user name and chooses E-mail). If
you never request E-mail to be sent to a user, the specified name@domain.ext need
not even be a valid E-mail address. The domain.ext should not be all numeric;
specifically, it must not be an IP address.
The optional registered telephone number is the user’s phone number where OmniTouch
ACS can call the user to join the user into a call. The user can subsequently change this
number from the end user’s web user interface, allowing the user to be called wherever he
or she is located.
Phone numbers must have either a leading +1 if they are within the North American
numbering plan, or +countrycode if they are outside of the North American numbering
plan.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-55
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management Parameter action formats
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The optional pre-assigned reservationless access code allows the system administrator to
establish reservationless or “standing” conferences that users can make use of at any time,
without having to schedule them in advance.
The access code provided here is the Participants’ access code. The Alcatel-Lucent
OmniTouch Advanced Communications Server (ACS) will automatically create the
user’s Leader access code.
To inform the users of their pre-assigned Leader and Participant access codes, you will
need to retrieve the complete list of all users’ Participant and Leader access codes by
clicking on Download Reservationless Conferences in the menu on the Provisioning
screen (“Download reservationless conferences” (p. 4-72)).
Note: A semi-colon (;) separates all list modifiers within the list.
Example:
update,name@domain.com,phone_action1=add;
phone_no1=1111;phone_label1=HOME;
phone_source1=PBX;primary_phone=phone_no1
Parameter action formats

add – adds a user to the system.
add,user@domain.com,password,[phone number],[access code],[participant access code]
The phone number is the registered phone number. The access code is used for an
automatically scheduled reservationless conference and must be present for a participant
code to be assigned.
change – changes the major settings for a user.
change,user@domain.com,password,[phone number],[access code],[participant access code]
rename – changes a user’s login username.

rename,old_name@domain.com,new_name@domain.com
This command is useful if a company changes its domain name – for example, converting
xxxx@edial.com to xxxx@alcatel-lucent.com
update – sets or modifies settings and preferences of a user.
update,user@domain.com,parameters
delete – deletes a user from the system.

delete,user@domain.com
Note: Bulk provision parameters in the CSV file are case sensitive. For example:
add,user1@Alcatel-Lucent.com,password,[registered_phone_number],
[pre-assigned_reservationless_access_code] would add the user.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-56 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management Supported bulk provision parameters
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Add,user1@Alcatel-Lucent.com,password,[registered_phone_number],
[pre-assigned_reservationless_access_code] would not add the user.
Supported bulk provision parameters

Parameter name value pairs are separated by an equal (=) sign. You can separate each
parameter value pair with a semi-colon. If a parameter is a boolean type, the valid values
are Y, y, and 1 for true, and N, n, and 0 for false.
Parameter Format
parameter1=value1;parameter2=value2;parameter3=value3
Table 4-13 Parameter Descriptions
Parameter Description
display_name Screen name for the user during Instant Messaging sessions.
language Language for text in user interface (for example, ENG_US).
description Description of user that appears in description column
associated with that user in server Administration web site.
broadcast_enabled Boolean value that determines if the user is allowed to use
the system to broadcast messages.
broadcast_ports Number of voice ports the user is allowed to use during a
broadcast.
disk_quota_enabled Boolean value that determines if the user is subject to a disk
usage quota.
disk_quota_mb Number of megabytes of disk space the user is allowed to
use on the system.
reservationless_setting Boolean value that determines if the user is allowed to
schedule reservationless conferences.
reservationless_length_weeks Sets the maximum number of weeks a reservationless
conference is valid.
require_project_code Boolean value that determines if the user is required to
submit a project code for every conference scheduled.
require_department_code Boolean value that determines if the user is required to
submit a department code for every conference scheduled.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-57
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
close_on_logout_enabled Boolean that determines if the My Teamwork Instant
Messaging window is automatically closed when the user
logs out.
executive_enabled Boolean value that determines if the user is an executive
user who is eligible to use voice ports set aside for executive
users.
dialin_enabled Boolean value that determines if the user is allowed to use
the system to dial in during a conference.
dialout_enabled Boolean value that determines if the user is allowed to use
the system to dial out during a conference.
recording_enabled Boolean value that determines if the user is allowed to use
recording features.
rich_presence_enabled Boolean value that determines if the user is allowed to
determine if other users are online. and to let others see
that this user is online.
multiple_leaders_enabled Boolean value that determines if the user is allowed to have
more than one leader in the same conference.
video_enabled Boolean value that determines if the user is allowed to use
video features.
video_endpoint Video endpoint for the user.
require_pwd_change Boolean value that determines whether the user must
change his or her login password the next time that user
signs in.
allow_auto_extend Boolean value that determines if the user is allowed to
extend the time for reserved ports if the conference exceeds
its scheduled limit and there are enough ports to extend the
conference.
allow_attachments Boolean value that determines whether the user is allowed
to post attachments to Instant Messaging (IM) sessions.
allow_appsharing Boolean value that determines whether the user is allowed
to use the application and desktop sharing feature during an
Instant Messaging (IM) session.
billing_extension Sets the billing code for the user.
call_barring_rule Sets the call barring rule ID for the user.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-58 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
lcs_sip_uri Sets the LCS SIP URI for the user. (Live Communication
Server SIP URI)
lock_video_mcu Boolean value sets whether the user’s video MCU settings
are locked.
lock_video_client Boolean value sets whether the user’s video client settings
are locked.
contact_search Boolean value sets whether the user is allowed to search the
provisioned users list to find contacts.
mobile_gateway Boolean value sets whether the user is allowed to access the
system through the mobile gateway.
moc_user Boolean value sets whether the user is allowed to access the
system through Microsoft Office Communicator.
sametime_user Boolean value sets whether the user is allowed to access the
system through IBM Lotus Sametime.
operator Boolean value determines whether the user is an operator. If
this value is true, then an operator conference is also
created for this user.
away_timeout Sets the number of minutes of inactivity before the user’s
presence is set to ‘away.’ The following values are valid:
0 Do not change status
5 5 minutes
10 10 minutes
15 15 minutes
20 20 minutes
30 30 minutes
45 45 minutes
60 60 minutes
block_im_busy Determines whether My Teamwork will block Instant
Messages to a user whose presence is set to ‘busy.’
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-59
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
current_filter Sets the current view filter for the user. The following
values are allowed:
BLOCKED Filter out blocked contacts
NONE No filtering – show all contacts
OFF_BLOCK Filter out offline, blocked contacts
OFFLINE Filter out offline contacts
auto_accept Boolean value determines whether new contact requests
will automatically be accepted.
default_status Sets the default presence status on sign-in for the user. The
following values are valid:
AWAY Away
BRB Be Right Back
BUSY Busy
CUSTOM Custom
OFFLINE Offline
ONLINE Online
ON_PHONE On the Phone
OUT2LUNCH Out to Lunch
play_sound Boolean value determines whether a sound is played at the

beginning of an IM session.
auto_add Boolean value determines whether a newly accepted
contact is automatically added to the user’s contact list.
send_on_enter Determines whether an Instant Message (IM) is sent when
the user presses the Enter key.
offline_onthephone Determines whether the server automatically sets the
presence of an offline user to “on the phone” when that user
is called by name using the phone.
expand_im_window Determines whether participants in a conference
automatically have their browser windows expanded when
an application sharing session is started.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-60 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
email_type Sets the default E-mail invitation format. The following
values are valid:
LONG Generic Long
SHORT Generic Short
POPUP Popup Window
appshare_in_front Determines whether a conversation window is allowed to
appear over an application sharing session window.
two_party_call_window Determines whether two participants in a call automatically
have a two-party call window pop up when a call is started.
Phone List Management
Each one of the following parameters is managed through the Update action in Bulk
Provisioning:
update,name@domain.com,parameters
phone_action [1...n] The following actions can be performed using this

parameter:
• Add
• Modify
• Delete
Example: Bulk Provisioning of Phones
Note: phone_label and primary_phone are optional
parameters.
phone_id represents the phone number to which you are
applying an action. It is usualy the extension. It is followed
by an asterisk (*) and the phone label associated with it.
Important! Only one PBX phone number can be stored
in the database. When a new PBX number is added, it
overwrites/replaces any existing PBX number.
To add a new phone:
update,name@domain.com,phone_action1=add;
phone_no1=1111;phone_label1=HOME;
phone_source1=PBX;primary_phone=phone_no1
To modify a phone (using above example):
update,name@domain.com,phone_action1=modify;
phone_no1=2222;phone_label1=GSM;
phone_source1=PBX;phone_id1=x1111*HOME
To delete a phone (using above example):
update,name@domain.com,phone_action1=delete;
phone_id1=x2222*GSM
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-61
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
phone_no[1...n] This may be the user’s registered phone number or any
other phone number associated with the user (e.g., mobile
number).
phone_source [1...n] This can be one of the three following Types:
• Admin
• User
• PBX (Must be licensed for ECS)
Note: Users cannot modify/edit the Admin value and
the PBX presence value.
phone_label [1...n] This is a text value that describes a specific phone (for
example, desk, mobile, business).
phone_id [1...n] This consists of the following format:
Phone Number*Phone Label
primary_phone This is the user’s registered phone number.
Video Settings
Each one of the following settings must be present. The only exception is that either registrar
or proxy may be set, or both may be set. If only one is set, the video preferences will be set.
video_internal_client Boolean value indicates that the internal video client
should be used.
video_auto_answer Boolean value indicates that the internal video client
should automatically answer a call.
video_internal_audio Boolean value indicates that the internal video client
should be used for audio.
reg_username Username to be used to log into the video registrar or proxy.
reg_password Password to be used to log into the registrar or proxy.
registrar DNS resolvable address of the SIP registrar used for video.
This value may be omitted if the proxy value is supplied.
proxy DNS resolvable address of the SIP proxy used for video.
This value may be omitted if the registrar value is supplied.
realm Realm used when communicating with the SIP registrar or
proxy.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-62 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management Possible bulk provisioning messages
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
transport Transport mechanism used to communicate with the SIP
registrar or proxy. The following values are valid:
• UDP
• TCP
• TLS
authentication Authentication mechanism used to authenticate
the user with the SIP registrar or proxy. The following
values are valid:
• None
• Digest
• Basic
• NTLM
During the processing of a bulk provisioning file, the system sends information about the
progress of the operation.
Possible bulk provisioning messages

line_number=actual line number in the bulk provisioning file
UserName=OmniTouch ACS user name
0 Update {# user parameters} parameter(s) for user: UserName={user name} in

domain {domain} line:line_number
0 Deleted user: UserName={user name} in domain {domain} line:line_number
0 Provisioned user: UserName={user name} in domain {domain} line:line_number
0 Updated user: UserName={user name} in domain {domain} line:line_number
0 {Success message about conference provisioning} line:line_number
1 Blank UserName: line:line_number
2 Blank Password: line:line_number
3 Blank Action: line:line_number
5 Failed to provision user [User already exists in domain {domain}]:
UserName={username} line:line_number
6 Failed to provision user({result message}): UserName={user name} in domain
{domain} line:line_number
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-63
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Failed to set user phone number: UserName={user name} in domain {domain}

line:line_number
8 Failed to delete user: UserName={user name} in domain {domain}, Result is
{result message} line:line_number
9 Failed to update user’s password: UserName={user name} in domain {domain}
line:line_number
9 Failed to schedule a conference:
Please provide an access code that is 7 digits long and starts with {two digits provided by
the system} line:line_number
9 Failed to schedule a conference:
{Error message}: {access code} UserName={username} line:line_number
10 Invalid Action: line:line_number
11 Failed to delete user: No such User: {user name} in domain {domain}
line:line_number
12 Failed to change user: No such User: {user name} in domain {domain}
line:line_number
13 Username\@{ip address} is not a valid username. line:line_number
13 Failed to update user: No such User: {user name} in domain {domain}
line:line_number
14 Failed to set user PBX presence phone number: UserName={user name} in
domain {domain} line:line_number
20 Update: Failed to find user({result message}): UserName={user name} in domain
21 Update: Failed to set {parameter}={value} (result={result message}):
UserName={user name} in domain {domain} line:line_number
22 Bad param for {parameter} - >{value}< - UserName={user name} in domain
23 Update: Failed to find blocking rule {value}: UserName={user name} in domain
24 Unable to set lcs_sip_uri to >{value}< for user {user name} line:line_number
25 Unable to set video_mcu_lock to >{value}< for user {user name}
line:line_number
27 Unable to set contact_search_enable to >{value}< for user {user name}
line:line_number
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-64 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
28 Unable to set mgw flag to >{value}< for user {user name} line:line_number
29 Unable to set moc flag to >{value}< for user {user name} line:line_number
30 Unable to enable operator flag for user {user name} line:line_number
31 Unable to create operator conference for user {user name} line:line_number
31 Unable to disable operator flag for user {user name} line:line_number
32 Unable to delete operator conference for {user name} line:line_number
33 Unable to set away timeout for {user name} line:line_number
34 Unable to set the user to block IMs when busy for {user name} line:line_number
35 Unable to set the user contact filter to {value} for {user name} line:line_number
36 Unable to set the auto accept new contacts flag for {user name} line:line_number
37 Unable to set the default status for {user name} line:line_number
38 Unable to set the play sound on IM flag for {user name} line:line_number
39 Unable to set the auto flag for {user name} line:line_number
40 Unable to set the send on enter for {user name} line:line_number
41 Unable to set the offline phone presence setting for {user name} line:line_number
line:line_number
42 Unable to set the expand IM window flag for {user name} line:line_number
43 Unable to set the email invitation format for {user name} line:line_number
44 Unable to set the ‘Disallow conversation window in front of an application sharing
window’ setting for {user name} line:line_number
45 Unable to set the ‘show conversation window for two-party calls’ setting for {user
name} line:line_number
46 Unable to set video preferences video_internal_client was not provided for {user
47 Unable to set video preferences video_auto_answer was not provided for {user
48 Unable to set video preferences video_internal_audio was not provided for {user
49 Unable to set video preferences reg_username was not provided for {user name}
line:line_number
50 Unable to set video preferences reg_password was not provided for {user name}
line:line_number
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-65
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
51 Unable to set video preferences registrar or proxy was not provided for {user
52 Unable to set video preferences realm was not provided for {user name}
line:line_number
53 Unable to set video preferences transport was not provided for {user name}
line:line_number
54 Unable to set video preferences authentication was not provided for {user name}
line:line_number
55 Missing SIP registrar or proxy information for {user name} line:line_number
56 Unable to set video client settings for {user name} line:line_number
57 Unable to set phone {phone number} for {user}. Required parameters are missing
(Unknown phone_action). line:line_number
58 Unable to set phone {phone number} for {user}. Invalid phone – {phone
number} line:line_number
59 Unable to set phone for {user}. Cannot delete phone with ID: {phone ID}
line:line_number
60 Unable to set phone {phone number} for {user}. Cannot add phone: {phone
number} line:line_number
61 Unable to set phone {phone number} for {user}. Cannot modify phone with ID:
{phone ID} line:line_number
62 Unable to set phones for {user}. License required for primary_phone
line:line_number
63 Unable to set phones for {user}. License required for phone_source {index}
line:line_number
65 Unable to set phone {phone number} for {user}. Required parameters are missing
(Unknown phone_source). line:line_number
66 Unable to set phones for username. Only one “PBX” phone allowed per user.
line:line_number
Waiting for CPU load to fall below 80% (currently {CPU percentage}%) line:line_number
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-66 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management Bulk provision reservationless conferences
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Bulk provision reservationless conferences

The ACS bulk provisioning process lets the system administrator select the user’s leader
access code. The system selects the participant access code. Alternatively, the system
administrator can let the server set both the participant access code and the leader access
code.
In either case, the process is performed using a text file. This file needs to be prepared in
advance using standard PC editing tools, or a spreadsheet application that can save in text
format. Each line starts with a registered user name, and (optionally) a leader access code
and (optionally) a participant access code. The access code format must be a total of seven
digits long. The access codes may start with the server’s 2-digit Node ID (typically 01)
followed by five random or user-specified digits, or the system administrator may set the
access code format to the server’s 1-digit Node ID followed by six random or user defined
digits. Each line in the text file consists of:
• Userid
• Leader access code
Example: 2-digit Node ID
For a user on Node 01, 0123456, or for a user on Node 02, 0235671
Example: 1-digit Node ID
For a user on Node 01, 1234567, or for a user on Node 02, 2345671
Examples:
userA@alcatel-lucent.com
(the system selects the leader and participant access codes)
userB@alcatel-lucent.com,0123457
(the leader access code is specified; the system selects the participant code)
userC@alcatel-lucent.com,0123458,0123459
(both leader and participants codes are specified)
This file needs to be prepared in advance using standard PC editing tools, or a spreadsheet
application that can save in CSV format. You select the Organization you want to
provision from the drop-down list.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-67
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management Export user data
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-30 Bulk Provisioning Reservationless Conferences
After the file has been selected and processed, to retrieve the resulting leader/participant
access code pairs, you must perform the Download Reservationless Conferences step
(see Download reservationless conferences).
Export user data

This page is used to export user provisioning data to an XML file. (User Settings, User
Preferences, User Contact lists) The XML file may be edited in an XML editor and
imported to enable administrators to set specific parameters for a set of users. The file may
also be imported on another server to move a user population to a new server.
Note: User conference data is NOT exported.
Figure 4-31 Export User’s Provisioning Data
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-68 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management Import user data
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Import user data

You can use this page to import user provisioning data including user settings, user
preferences, and user contact lists from an XML file. Typically, the XML file is a result of
the Export User Data item in Provisioning–>Export User Data. The XML file may be
edited in an XML editor and imported to enable administrators to set specific parameters
for a set of users. The file may also be imported on another server to move a user
population to a new server.
Figure 4-32 Import Users
XML Document Type Definition (DTD)

<!DOCTYPE users>
<!ELEMENT users (domain+)>
<!ELEMENT domain (organization+)>

<!ATTLIST domain name CDATA #REQUIRED>
<!ELEMENT organization (user+)>

<!ATTLIST organization name CDATA #REQUIRED>
<!ELEMENT user
(profile?,settings?,media_endpoint?,audio_client?,video_client?,assis
tant*,preferences?,phone*,contact*,group*)>
<!ATTLIST user name CDATA #REQUIRED>
<!ATTLIST profile password CDATA>

<!ATTLIST profile password_ts CDATA>
<!ATTLIST profile text_lang (DEU-DE|ENG-US|FRE-FR|ITA-IT|
KOR-KN|POR-PT|SPA-ES|ZHO-CN)>
<!ATTLIST profile audio_lang (DEU-DE|ENG-US|FRE-FR|ITA-IT|
KOR-KN|POR-PT|SPA-ES|ZHO-CN)>
<!ATTLIST profile ldap_id CDATA>
<!ATTLIST profile security_level_id CDATA>
<!ATTLIST profile screen_name CDATA>
<!ATTLIST profile homepage CDATA>
<!ATTLIST profile description CDATA>
<!ATTLIST profile bill_code CDATA>
<!ATTLIST profile context CDATA>
<!ATTLIST profile lcs_sip_uri CDATA>
<!ELEMENT profile (blocking_rule*)>
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-69
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management Import user data
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
<!ATTLIST blocking_rule name CDATA #REQUIRED>

<!ATTLIST blocking_rule description CDATA>
<!ATTLIST blocking_rule rule CDATA #REQUIRED>
<!ATTLIST settings reservationless (ALNR|ALR|NAL)>

<!ATTLIST settings reservationless_length CDATA>
<!ATTLIST settings allow_appsharing (true|false)>
<!ATTLIST settings allow_attachments (true|false)>
<!ATTLIST settings moc (true|false)>
<!ATTLIST settings video_mcu_lock (true|false)>
<!ATTLIST settings video_client_lock (true|false)>
<!ATTLIST settings auto_extend (true|false)>
<!ATTLIST settings contact_search (true|false)>
<!ATTLIST settings broadcast (true|false)>
<!ATTLIST settings require_proj (true|false)>
<!ATTLIST settings require_dept (true|false)>
<!ATTLIST settings close_on_logout (true|false)>
<!ATTLIST settings disk_quota_enabled (true|false)>
<!ATTLIST settings disk_quota CDATA>
<!ATTLIST settings client_connector (true|false)>
<!ATTLIST settings deny_mult_lead (true|false)>
<!ATTLIST settings dial_out (true|false)>
<!ATTLIST settings exec_ind (true|false)>
<!ATTLIST settings irp (true|false)>
<!ATTLIST settings max_calls CDATA>
<!ATTLIST settings mgw (true|false)>
<!ATTLIST settings oper (true|false)>
<!ATTLIST settings presence_publisher (true|false)>
<!ATTLIST settings require_pwd_change (true|false)>
<!ATTLIST settings subs_to_all (true|false)>
<!ATTLIST settings video_enabled (true|false)>
<!ATTLIST media_endpoint endpoint_type #FIXED "video">

<!ATTLIST media_endpoint endpoint CDATA>
<!ATTLIST audio_client enabled (true|false)>

<!ATTLIST audio_client username CDATA>
<!ATTLIST audio_client password CDATA>
<!ELEMENT audio_client (sip_registrar)>
<!ATTLIST video_client enabled' (true|false)>

<!ATTLIST video_client username CDATA>
<!ATTLIST video_client password CDATA>
<!ATTLIST video_client auto_answer (true|false)>
<!ATTLIST video_client use_video_audio (true|false)>
<!ELEMENT video_client (sip_registrar)>
<!ATTLIST sip_registrar registrar CDATA>

<!ATTLIST sip_registrar proxy CDATA>
<!ATTLIST sip_registrar realm CDATA>
<!ATTLIST sip_registrar transport CDATA>
<!ATTLIST sip_registrar authentication CDATA>
<!ATTLIST assistant name CDATA>
<!ATTLIST preferences>
<!ATTLIST preferences add_on_allow (true|false)>
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-70 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management Delete user data
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
<!ATTLIST preferences accept_contacts (true|false)>

<!ATTLIST preferences busy (true|false)>
<!ATTLIST preferences away_timeout (0|5|10|15|20|30|45|60)>
<!ATTLIST preferences unavailable_timeout #FIXED "30">
<!ATTLIST preferences contact_filter
(NONE|OFFLINE|OFF_BLOCK|BLOCKED)>
<!ATTLIST preferences sort_order (GROUP|NAME|PRESENCE|PH_STATUS)>
<!ATTLIST preferences default_status
(ONLINE|AWAY|BUSY|OFFLINE|BRB|ON_PHONE|OUT2LUNCH)>
<!ATTLIST preferences email_length (NONE|LONG|SHORT|POPUP)>
<!ATTLIST preferences emoticons (true|false)>
<!ATTLIST preferences enable_im (true|false)>
<!ATTLIST preferences play_sound (true|false)>
<!ATTLIST preferences pop_window (true|false)>
<!ATTLIST preferences im_send_on_enter (true|false)>
<!ATTLIST preferences appshare_in_front (true|false)>
<!ATTLIST preferences two_party_call_window (true|false)>
<!ATTLIST preferences offline_onthephone (true|false)>
<!ATTLIST preferences expand_im_window (true|false)>
<!ATTLIST phone phone_no CDATA>

<!ATTLIST phone description CDATA>
<!ATTLIST phone primary_ind (true|false)>
<!ATTLIST phone source (user|admin|pbx)>
<!ATTLIST contact name CDATA>

<!ATTLIST contact status (S|A)>
<!ATTLIST contact reverse_status (S|A)>
<!ATTLIST contact screen_name CDATA>
<!ATTLIST group name CDATA>

<!ELEMENT group (contact_group*)>
<!ATTLIST group_contact name CDATA>
Delete user data

You can delete all users from a specified organization, or from all organizations. All user
data, including conferences, recordings, file attachments, and presentations are removed.
The organization may also be deleted if you check the Delete Organization(s) after
deleting users checkbox.
Figure 4-33 Delete Users
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-71
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management Download reservationless conferences
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Download reservationless conferences
To download all users’ reservationless access code sets

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Download Reservationless Conferences item.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Type in a path and file name (to save on your local computer) for the file that will contain
the users’ reservationless access code sets.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Select the associated organization from the drop-down list.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click Save.
Figure 4-34 Downloading Reservationless Conferences
Note: The resulting file will contain all the reservationless code sets on the system,
including ones users have created for themselves.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-72 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management Add Administrator user
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Add Administrator user

This screen allows you to add a system administrator.
Figure 4-35 Adding a System Administrator
To add a system administrator

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Add Admin User item.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter the new Administrator’s user name and password.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Select the type of Administrator.

System-wide Administrator: This is typically a service provider. The SA can
provision organizations and individual users. In addition, the SA can monitor any
activity on a stack. Generally, only the SA is able to upload any files to the server,
including translations, prompts, branding and executables.
Organization Administrator: The OA can provision users and create Reports for
their specific Organization.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Select an Organization from the drop-down list to associate with the Administrator.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-73
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management List Administrators
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click Create Admin.

END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
List Administrators
This screen allows you to view what users have system administration rights.
Figure 4-36 List of System Administrators
To see what users have system administration rights

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the List Admins item.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 From the resulting screen, you can select Administrators to delete by checking the box in
the Delete column next to the administrator and clicking the Delete button.
You can delete any administrator except the one that is currently logged in. In the screen
below, the system administrator is logged in with the “admin” user account.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-74 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management Change Administrator password
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Change Administrator password

A system administrator can change his or her own password through this screen.
Figure 4-37 Changing an Administrator’s Password
To change the Adminstrator’s password

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Change Current Admin Password item.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter the same new password in both boxes.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click the Update button.

END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-75
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management Find a user in a stack
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Find a user in a stack

In a multi-server site, or in an installation where multiple systems are federated, you may
need to find out which server a particular user is registered on.
To find a user
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Find User item.

The User Lookup screen appears.
Figure 4-38 Find User
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter the complete user name in the text entry field.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Search.
If that user name is registered on a server, the result will display the site/server and the
registered user name:
Figure 4-39 User Name
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-76 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management To find a user
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click the Username to manage the user’s profile.

END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 4-77
November 20, 2008

Provisioning and Account Management To find a user
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-78 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

5 Monitoring
Overview
Purpose
The items documented in this chapter are available from the Monitoring menu.
Application and Server management is provided through these functions.
Contents
Topics:
Monitoring administration 5-2
Viewing active calls 5-3

Viewing active media 5-4
Viewing active users 5-8
Send alerts to active users 5-9
System status 5-9
System information 5-11
Trunk status 5-13
Site connections 5-13
Viewing data replication 5-15
Server status 5-17
System commands 5-19
SIP logs 5-20
Viewing PSTN logs 5-21
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 5-1
November 20, 2008

Monitoring Monitoring administration
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedures:
To view all conferences on the controlling (primary) server which are currently 5-3
up on all systems in a stack
To see media (calls; application sharing; video) that are currently up on a 5-4
particular server
To see a list of users who are currently logged in to the system 5-8
To see the system disk status 5-10
To monitor data replication state 5-15
To determine which server processes may need to be restarted and to check the 5-18
server process status
To generate a SIP log 5-20
Monitoring administration
Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch ACS includes a number of screens to allow administrators the
ability to monitor both the server itself and activities of system users. (The Trunk Status
item appears only if there are active Trunks.)
Note: System-wide Administrators are the only administrators with access to the
Monitoring menu.
Figure 5-1 Monitoring
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-2 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Monitoring Viewing active calls
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Viewing active calls
To view all conferences on the controlling (primary) server

which are currently up on all systems in a stack
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click the Monitoring tab.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Active Calls item.

The Active Calls screen shows the calls and participants currently in those calls on this
system.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-2 Viewing Active Calls
From this screen, the System-wide Administrator can view all active calls with legs that
are controlled by this individual server or stack – when they were scheduled for, who the
participants are, and how long each leg has been up. The administrator can select the
refresh frequency rate by selecting one of the following:
• Refresh Once – This creates a static ‘snapshot’ of the active calls at a moment in time.
It is helpful when you have a large group of users and are trying to locate the activity of
a specfic user.
• Refresh every 30 seconds
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 5-3
November 20, 2008

Monitoring Viewing active media
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In addition, the System Administrator has the ability to:

• Drop individual legs (Drop Leg)
• End the entire call (End Call).
• Collect diagnostics data on a problematic call. Collect call quality data initiates a
collection of one minute’s worth of voice quality data, and downloads it to the System
Administrator’s PC. This feature should only be used when requested by your customer
support representative. The support representative will use this data when assisting
with the diagnosis of audio quality issues.
Viewing active media

The Active Media screen shows the call legs currently on a specific system.
To see media (calls; application sharing; video) that are

currently up on a particular server
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Active Media item.

END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-4 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Monitoring To see media (calls; application sharing; video) that are
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-3 Active Media
Type • Audio
• AppSharing (if licensed)
• Video (if licensed)
Current These are the ports that are in current use for each
media type.
Total Allowed This is the total amount of ports alloted to each
media type.
Quiesce Media Server Clicking this button allows existing current media
legs to continue until termination, but does not
allow new legs. The “Quiesced Server” can then be
activated back to normal functioning.
Figure 5-4 Quiesce Media Server Warning Dialog Box
From active media screen, the System-wide Administrator can view all active media– the
media type, who the participants are, and how long each has been up.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 5-5
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The administrator can select the refresh frequency rate by selecting one of the following:
• Refresh Once – This creates a ‘snapshot’ of the active calls at a moment in time. It is
helpful when you have a large group of users (more than 30) and are trying to locate
the activity of a specfic user.
In addition, the System Administrator has the ability to:
• Drop individual legs (Drop Leg)
• End the entire call (End Call).
• Collect diagnostics data on a problematic call. Collect call quality data initiates a
collection of one minute’s worth of voice quality data, and downloads it to the System
Administrator’s PC. This feature should only be used when requested by your customer
support representative. The support representative will use this data when assisting
with the diagnosis of audio quality issues.
Figure 5-5 Collect Call Quality Data
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-6 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-6 Call Quality Data File Download
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 5-7
November 20, 2008

Monitoring Viewing active users
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Viewing active users

This screen shows the status of all active users.
• Refresh Once – This creates a ‘snapshot’ of the active users at a moment in time. It is
helpful when you have a large group of users (more than 30) and are trying to locate
the activity of a specfic user.
Figure 5-7 Active Users
To see a list of users who are currently logged in to the

system
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Active Users item.

A list of all active users and their current status appears.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-8 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Monitoring Send alerts to active users
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Send alerts to active users

From this screen, the System Administrator can send alerts to all users in all domains or to
specific organizations within a domain (for example, “System will be rebooted in 10
minutes.”) The message appears in a pop-up on the user’s desktop.
Figure 5-8 Send Alerts
System status
System status shows the disk usage of Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch ACS. The system
normally operates with disk usage well under 100%. If disk usage approaches 100%,
contact your support representative.
Access code usage indicates how many access codes are currently valid and in use. If
access code usage approaches 100%, contact your support representative.
• Refresh Once – This creates a ‘snapshot’ of the system status at a moment in time. It is
helpful when you have a large group of users (more than 30).
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 5-9
November 20, 2008

Monitoring To see the system disk status
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To see the system disk status

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the System Status item.

The following screen appears.
Figure 5-9 Viewing System Status
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-10 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Monitoring System information
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
System information
Relevant server statistics and configuration information appear on this screen (System
Info). This information can be used by Support to troubleshoot specific server issues.
Table 5-1 System Information

Date This is the date when the information was
collected.
ACS Version This is version of the Alcatel_lucent
OmniTouch Advanced Communication Server
software that is in use on the server.
Current Kernel This is the Linux Kernel.
Uptime This gives the amount of time the server has
been up, the number of users and the load
average.
lspci This gives information about the cards on the
system.
/proc/mdstat This gives information about the RAID
configuration.
/etc/sysconfig/hwconf This gives information about the hardware
configuration.
/proc/cpuinfo This gives information about the processor.
/proc/meminfo This gives information about system memory
usage.
df This gives information about the total space and
available space on the file system.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 5-11
November 20, 2008

Monitoring System information
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-10 System Information
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-12 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Monitoring Trunk status
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trunk status
The trunk status screen shows the status (“in service” or “down”) and the number of
active channels for each PSTN trunk on the server. The menu option is hidden if there are
no trunks installed. Should a trunk need to be serviced, it can be quiesced and
subsequently restarted by clicking on the Enable button corresponding to that trunk.
Quiesce disables the trunk for additional users, but does not disconnect users who are
already on that trunk. Clicking Disable disconnects the users.
Clicking on the trunk number displays the active legs for that trunk.
Note: The number of available trunks displayed will vary according to your
configuration.
• Refresh Once – This creates a ‘snapshot’ of the trunk status at a moment in time. It is
helpful when you have a large group of users.
Figure 5-11 Viewing Trunk Status
Site connections
Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch Advanced Communications Servers (ACS) may be deployed
in a distributed configuration of multiple sites. Each server in a site is configured with
information about other sites with which it can establish distributed conferences. The
names of the other sites with which a specific server is “federated” are shown in the
Remote Sites list, along with the number of registered users on this server.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 5-13
November 20, 2008

Monitoring Site connections
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Other sites that are connected to this server have a status of CONNECTED.
• Refresh Once – This creates a ‘snapshot’ of the connected sites at a moment in time.
It is helpful when you have a large number of sites with a large group of users and are
trying to locate information on a specfic site.
Figure 5-12 Connected Sites
Table 5-2 Site Connections Fields

Hostname These are the names of the servers which are
“federated” with each other.
Stack Name This is the name of a local (or remote) stack of
servers where the associated server (host)
resides.
Status This shows the connected state of a specific
server.
ID Unique identifier for a specific server.
PSM Identifies whether (Y) or not (N) the server is
an Application Server (Primary or Secondary)
or a Media Server. A server may also be both an
Application (Primary or Secondary) and a
Media Server.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-14 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Monitoring Viewing data replication
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ICS Users Identifies the number of My Teamwork Instant

Messaging Users.
User Count This is the number of registered users on a
specific server. To see a list of users registered on
a specific server, click on the number under
User Count associated with that server.
Eth1 Calls that stay within the private network
(Stack Servers) go out through Eth1 (IP
Address).
Eth0 Calls that go out to a remote site go out through
Eth0 (IP Address).
Last Received Heartbeat This is the last time the associated server
received a communication from another server
within the stack.
Last Received EndOfData The is the last time all server related
information was completely sent when the
server joined the stack.
Last Sent Heartbeat This is the last time the associated server sent
out a communication to another server in the
stack.
Viewing data replication

Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch Advanced Communications Servers (ACS) support
automated failover within a stack to provide high availability (see Data replication). This
is done by designating a Secondary server to be a live synchronized backup to its respective
Primary server. Once the servers are configured as Primary and Secondary, the state of the
data replication can be monitored.
To monitor data replication state

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 5-15
November 20, 2008

Monitoring To monitor data replication state
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A screen like the following appears. The state of data replication will be indicated in the
browser window, and may be refreshed by selecting one of the following:
• Refresh Once – This creates a ‘snapshot’ of the data state at a moment in time. It is
helpful when you have a large group of very active users and are trying to locate
information at a specific point in time.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-13 Data Replication Status
The field headings in this table are as follows:

Start time – This is the date and time when the data replication was started.
Backup Server – This is the server that is accepting the replicated data.
CONNECTED/IN PROGRESS/NOT CONNECTED – This is the state of the replication.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-16 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Monitoring Server status
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-3 Data Replication States
State Definition
NOT CONNECTED Database replication is
not happening.
IN PROGRESS Servers are trying to
establish database
replication.
CONNECTED Database replication is
working.
Outgoing – Data created on this server, sent to backup.

Incoming – Data created at backup, sent to this server.
Each data transaction goes through the following states:
New – Client just created data to be replicated.
Queued – Data readied for replication.
Pending – Data sent to backup, awaiting reply status.
Done – Success (an outgoing and incoming count appears).
OR
Error – Failure (an outgoing and incoming count appears).
Server status
The software in OmniTouch ACS is comprised of a number of processes, each one referred
to as a “server”. Each of these server processes is managed by a software watchdog to assure
proper operation. Under certain error conditions, it may be necessary to restart individual
server processes in OmniTouch ACS. This should be done only under the supervision of
your support representative.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 5-17
November 20, 2008

Monitoring To determine which server processes may need to be
restarted and to check the server process status
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To determine which server processes may need to be

restarted and to check the server process status
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Server Status button.

A screen similar to the following appears.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-14 Server Process Status
Table 5-4 Server Process Status Indicators
Color Text
Green – Normal 0 – Normal
Red – Disabled Services 1 – Disabled Services
Yellow – Informational Status X – Not Installed
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-18 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Monitoring System commands
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provide this information to your support representative if you are asked for it.
The state of server processes will be indicated in the browser window, and may be
refreshed by selecting one of the following:
• Refresh Once – This creates a ‘snapshot’ of the server process state at a moment in
time. It is helpful when you have a large group of very active users and are trying to
locate information at a specific point in time.
System commands
Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch Advanced Communications Servers (ACS) display
troubleshooting information through selection of the System Commands item. The
resulting screen displays information such as which server to ping to test connectivity,
network interface information, and routing table information. This information is useful
when troubleshooting problems with support over the phone.
Figure 5-15 System Commands Information
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 5-19
November 20, 2008

Monitoring SIP logs
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SIP logs
The SIP logs contain information related to your SIP configuration to be used by your
System Administrator or support representative for troubleshooting.
Note: SIP configuration details are located in /usr/eiab/eiab.conf.

SIP message exchanges for each call (incoming and outgoing) are located in
/var/log/tnslog-tp240dvr.log.
Figure 5-16 SIP Log
To generate a SIP log

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In Start Date, enter the date you want the log to start with in MM/DD/YYYY format.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In Start Time, enter the time you want the log to start with in HH:MM:SS format.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In End Date, enter the date you want the log to end with in MM/DD/YYYY format.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In End Time, enter the time you want the log to end with in HH:MM:SS format.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If you are generating a log for a specific call, enter the internal, unique ID for that call in
Call ID.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-20 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Monitoring Viewing PSTN logs
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: For Ad Hoc calls, a new ID is generated for each call. Scheduled and
Reservationless Conference calls use the same Call ID for each access. Call IDs must
not contain the @ character.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 For a specific user, enter the ID of the person called in User ID.
Note: When a number is dialed in, the Call Owner and User appear as the same.
When a person is dialed by Name, the name becomes the User ID. When a callback is
initiated, a temporary system ID is assigned (x.temp) and the temporary ID becomes
the User ID.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Click the View button to generate the log.

END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
Viewing PSTN logs

The PSTN trunk logs contain troubleshooting information to be used by your System
Administrator or support representative.
Note: PSTN configuration details are located in /usr/eiab/eiab.conf.

PSTN message exchanges for each call (incoming and outgoing) are located in
/var/log/tnslog-tp240dvr.log.
Figure 5-17 View PSTN Log
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 5-21
November 20, 2008

Monitoring Viewing PSTN logs
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-22 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

6 Server Reporting
Overview
Purpose
This chapter presents information about the reports that can be generated and how the
resulting information can be used to keep the system running in the most optimal way.
Contents
Topics:
Managing the system 6-2
Call Detail Reports 6-2
Trunk utilization statistics 6-4

VoIP utilization statistics 6-6
Scheduled conferences 6-7
System alerts log 6-9
Install history log 6-10
Disk usage 6-12
Procedures:
To generate Call Detail Reports 6-2
To generate trunk utilization statistics 6-4

To select the time range for which you want to review VoIP utilization 6-6
To view all conferences scheduled on a specific server 6-7
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 6-1
November 20, 2008

Server Reporting Managing the system
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To generate a system alerts log 6-9

To view a history log 6-11
Managing the system

OmniTouch ACS provides a number of status and system utilization reports. These
contain non-real-time data that is useful in managing the system on an ongoing basis.
Figure 6-1 Server Reporting Screen
Call Detail Reports

System administrators can generate reports that contain detailed information about every
leg in every conference within a specified time range.
To generate Call Detail Reports

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click the Reporting tab.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Call Detail Reports item.

The Call Detail Report screen appears.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-2 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Server Reporting To generate Call Detail Reports
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 6-2 View Call Details
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the day(s) from which the report is to be generated.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Select an organization from the drop-down list.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Enter a Project Code or Department Code if you want to view only system usage
associated with those codes.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Select the Report Format.
Note: For definitions of the report fields, see View Call Detail Report.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Click the View button.

A report screen appears.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 6-3
November 20, 2008

Server Reporting Trunk utilization statistics
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 6-3 Call Detail Report
Trunk utilization statistics

System administrators can generate reports that contain detailed information about trunk
utilization.
To generate trunk utilization statistics

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Trunk Utilization Statistics item.

The Trunk Utilization Statistics screen appears.
Figure 6-4 View Trunk Utilization Statistics
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the day(s) from which the report is to be generated.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-4 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Server Reporting To generate trunk utilization statistics
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Select an interval from the drop-down list. (15 minutes; 30 minutes; 1 hour)
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Type the Trunk Number.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A report histogram appears.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
The trunk utilization graph displays the PSTN port usage of the server for the date and
time range you select. This menu choice generates a bar chart that provides both number
of ports and number of port seconds for the selected time increments in the selected date
range. This is useful for monitoring capacity utilization of the server over time.
Figure 6-5 Trunk Utilization Histogram
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 6-5
November 20, 2008

Server Reporting VoIP utilization statistics
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VoIP utilization statistics

In systems configured to handle VoIP traffic (from SIP phones or gateways, for example),
you can generate reports on VoIP “port” utilization. In this case, “ports” are VoIP RTP
voice streams.
To select the time range for which you want to review VoIP
utilization
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the VoIP Utilization Statistics item.

A date range selection dialog box appears.
Figure 6-6 View VoIP Utilization
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the date range and the data time interval that you desire.
(15 minutes; 30 minutes; 1 hour)
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click View.
A histogram like the following appears. The green bars show the number of active ports
(streams) during a specific time slot. The red bars show the number of occupied port
(stream) seconds.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-6 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Server Reporting Scheduled conferences
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 6-7 VoIP Utilization Chart
This is useful for monitoring capacity utilization of the server over time.
Scheduled conferences
You can generate a report that shows all details for each scheduled conference on a server.
To view all conferences scheduled on a specific server

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Scheduled Conferences item.

A date range selection dialog box appears:
Figure 6-8 View Scheduled Conferences
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 6-7
November 20, 2008

Server Reporting To view all conferences scheduled on a specific server
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the date range you want to view.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Select an organization from the drop-down list.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click View.
A list of scheduled conferences like the one shown below appears.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
Figure 6-9 Scheduled Conference Report
Table 6-1 Scheduled Conference Report Fields

Owner The user who scheduled the call or for whom
the call was scheduled by either the user’s
delegate or the system administrator.
Subject The description of the call’s subject as entered
by the user when scheduling the call. For calls
with no subject (for example, ad hoc dial-out
calls), the phrase “Call on [date, time, time
zone]” is automatically entered.
Leader Code The Call Leader’s access code.
Start Time The date and time of the start of the leg of the
call represented by that row of the report.
End Time The date and time of the end of the leg of
the call represented by that row or the
report.
Participant Code The Participant’s access code.
Is Leader is Required Whether the Leader must be on the call for
other participants to be conferenced together.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-8 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Server Reporting System alerts log
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Billing Code The Billing Code entered (by the Owner or

the Owner’s Delegate) when the call is
scheduled.
Project Code The Project Code associated with the call.
Department Code The Department Code entered (by the
Owner or the Owner’s Delegate) when the call
is scheduled.
Are Multiple Leaders Allowed Whether multiple callers can join using the
Leader’s access code. If “N”(No), then only the
first caller using the Leader’s access code is
joined into the conference. If “Y” (Yes), then all
callers using the Leader’s access code are joined
into the conference.
Reserved Ports The number of ports reserved in advance for the
call.
System alerts log

You can view a history of the notifications that have been issued by the system for a
particular date period. The list will include alarms and general notifications (informational
alerts) that are generated by the server as a result of events on the system.
Note: System alerts information is located in /var/log/eiabmaillog.
To generate a system alerts log

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the System Alerts Log item.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the Start Date and End Date.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 6-9
November 20, 2008

Server Reporting Install history log
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
Figure 6-10 System Alerts Selection
A list of system alerts that have been sent to the System Administrator, similar to the
following appears.
Figure 6-11 System Alerts Results
Install history log

You can view a history of the system software installations and upgrades that have been
applied during the specified time period.
Note: All initial installation information is located in /root/install.log.

Information related to updates is located in /var/log/update/.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-10 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Server Reporting To view a history log
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To view a history log

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Install History Log item.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the Start Date and End Date.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
Figure 6-12 Install History Selection
A list of software installations, similar to the one shown below appears. The Package Type
option would normally only be used if requested by a customer support representative. It
provides more detail about individual components of the system.
Figure 6-13 Install History Results
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 6-11
November 20, 2008

Server Reporting Disk usage
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Disk usage
System administrators use this window to view overall disk usage and disk usage by
organization.
Figure 6-14 Disk Usage
Table 6-2 Disk Usage

File System / Root used for temporary storage and
location of database.
This should not be full
/boot This is where the initial kernel is loaded.
/slides This is typically large. It is used for storage of
numerous files such as user documents.
/var This is where the logs are stored.
Size This is the total space alloted for each system.
Used This is the amount of space currently used on each
system.
Available This is the available space on each system.
% Used This is the percentage used of the total space alloted to
each system.
Disk Allocation
16GB for root
12GB for /var
2GB for swap
remainder for /slides, used as follows:
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-12 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
50% for recordings, presentations, and attachments

50% for backup/restore
Example: with a 72GB drive:
16GB for root
12GB for /var
2GB for swap
20GB for recordings, presentations, and attachments
20GB for backup/restore
Figure 6-15 Disk Usage by Organization

Organization This is the Organization name within a Domain.
(Domain Name:Organization Name)
Quota (MB) This is the Quota allotted to an organization in MB.
Usage (MB) This is the amount of space (in MB) currently in use
by an organization.
Usage (%) This is the percentage of the total available space
currently in use.
Users Clicking on these links allows you to view disk usage
for each user within an organization.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 6-13
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-14 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

A Error Codes and Alarm
Conditions
Overview
Purpose
This appendix differentiates between alarms and alerts through conditions and examples.
Contents
Server Alarm Conditions and Messages A-1
Server Alert Conditions and Messages A-1
Server Alarm Conditions and Messages

No trunks available (trunkalert)
Subject= “ACS alarm” Message= “no phone trunks are operational.”
Description: T1/ISDN PRI circuit is out of service.
Server Alert Conditions and Messages

bbmux restart (alert)
Subject= “ACS alert” Message=”Blackberry server restart at HH:MM:SS MM/DD/YYYY
Description: A restart of the Blackberry Server at time specified.
ivr restart (alert)
Subject= “ACS alert” Message= “Incoming call server restart at HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY”
Description: A restart of the Incoming call server at the specified time. Dial-in
conferences are affected by this restart.
mcu restart (alert)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 A-1
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Subject= “ACS alert” Message= “Conference server restart at HH:MM:SS

MM/DD/YYYY”
Description: A restart of the Conference server at specified time.
upg restart (alert)
Subject= “ACS alert” Message= “http server restart at HH:MM:SS MM/DD/YYYY”
Description: A restart of the WEB server at specified time.
database restart (alert)
Subject= “ACS alert” Message= “database restart at HH:MM:SS MM/DD/YYYY”
Description: The Database service was restarted at specified time.
mux restart (alert)
Subject= “ACS alert” Message= “Sip multiplexor restart at HH:MM:SS MM/DD/YYYY”
Description: The SIP service was restarted at specified time.
tns restart (alert)
Subject= “ACS alert” Message= “Outgoing Call Server restart at HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY”
Description: A restart of the Outgoing Call Server at the specified time.
tp240driver restart (alert)
Subject= “ACS alert” Message= “phone trunk driver restart at HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY”
Description: The trunk configuration driver was restarted at the specified time.
Fewer than 9 ports are still available (trunkalert)
Subject= “ACS alert” Message= “only %d ports are currently unused at %s”,$nlines,
HH:MM:SS MM/DD/YYYY
Description: Number of ports available threshold alert.
Subject= “ACS alert” Message= “trunk lines $linecode went down HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY”
Description: Specified trunk ID went out of service.
Subject= “ACS info” Messages= “trunk lines $linecode ($resultCode) came up
HH:MM:SS MM/DD/YYYY”
Description: Trunk(s) ID now in service at specified time.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-2 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

B Server Alarms and
Alerts
Overview
Purpose
This table contains some of the most common Alarms and Alerts. Generally, Alerts
convey important status information and Alarms convey information that may impede
critical processes.
Note: If an error with the “DBJ-NNNN: ERROR...” Message ID occurs, contact

your Customer Support representative immediately to resolve the problem.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 B-1
November 20, 2008

B-2
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table B-1 Alerts/Alarms Corrective Maintenance Procedures
Note: Alert IDs (for example, ADM-1001) appear in the SNMP Trap ‘msgString’ field. Instance information (for
example, Music on hold parameters were set by $ADMIN) appears in the SNMP Trap ‘problemText’ field.
Alert/Alarm Impact Severity Description Instance Action

Server Service offered Informational This alert is raised if the Server Overbooked No immediate action
Overbooked could be reserved ports exceeds the required. Scheduled
General affected in port capacity of the server. conferences with
Alert/Alcatel- near future. reserved ports should be
Lucent Server reviewed.
Alert
Server Service offered Informational This is raised to indicate ‘\””<<timestr<<“\”\” System Administrator
Overbooked could be the server has been Server Overbooked\” should investigate and
General affected. overbooked for a certain make changes to not
Alert/Alcatel- period of time. This means allow system to be
Lucent Server the service during that overbooked.
Alert period could be affected.
Quota related Service offered Informational/ This alert is raised to “Quota related alert” System Administrator
alert could be Minor indicate a user or should investigate and
General affected. organization has exceeded make changes to the
Alert/Alcatel- the assigned disk quota. quotas, as needed.
Lucent Server
Alert
%s tried to N/A Informational This alert is raised if the %s tried to delete No immediate action
delete local user database in a stacked pair local user %s - remove required. Check user
%s - remove as contains any inconsistency as alternate\n databases.
alternate\n when synchronizing.
delete local user database in a stacked pair local user %s - required. Check user
%s - ignored\n contains any inconsistency ignored\n databases.
when synchronizing.
%s tried to add N/A Informational This alert is raised if the %s tried to add No immediate action
existing local database in a stacked pair existing local user %s required. Check user
user %s - contains any inconsistency - mark as databases.
8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008
mark as when synchronizing. alternate.\n

alternate.\n

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008
8AL90208USAD ed01
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

delete local user database in a stacked pair local user %s - remove required. Check user
%s - remove as contains any inconsistency as alternate\n databases.
alternate\n when synchronizing.
%s tried to add N/A Informational This alert is raised if the %s tried to add No immediate action
existing local database in a stacked pair existing local user %s required. Check user
user %s - contains any inconsistency - mark as databases.
mark as when synchronizing. alternate.\n
alternate.\n
ADM-1001 Music on hold Informational Music on hold parameters Music on hold No action needed.
General parameters were modified by an Admin parameters were set
Alert/Info were modified user using the web admin by $ADMIN
by an Admin tool.
user.
ADM-1002 System Informational System parameters were System parameters No action needed.
General Parameters modified by an Admin user set by $ADMIN
Alert/Info were modified using the web admin tool.
by an Admin
user.
ADM-1003 Phone trunk Informational Phone trunk parameters Phone trunk No action needed.
General parameters were modified by an Admin parameters set by
Alert/Info were modified user using the web admin $ADMIN. Restarting
by an Admin tool. Incorrectly configured phone trunk server
user. parameters could cause a and conference server
loss of dial out ability. at $now
System will drop calls
active on the PSTN board
when this change is
processed.
ADM-1004 Network Informational Network parameters were Network parameters No action needed.
General parameters modified by an Admin user have been set by
Alert/Info were modified using the web admin tool. $ADMIN
by an Admin Incorrectly configured
user. parameters could cause a
loss of connectivity to the
server.
ADM-1005 MGCP Informational MGCP parameters were MGCP parameters No action needed.
General parameters modified by an Admin user. have been set by
Alert/Info were modified $ADMIN.
by an Admin
user.
B-3

B-4
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ADM-1005 MGCP Informational MGCP parameters were MGCP parameters No action needed.
General parameters modified by an Admin user have been set by
Alert/Info were modified using the web admin tool. $admin_name.
by an Admin
user.
ADM-1005 Nightly Informational Nightly backup parameters Nightly backup No action needed.
General backup were modified by an Admin parameters have been
Alert/Info parameters user using the web admin set by $1.
were modified tool.
by an Admin
user.
ADM-1008 DAS rules Informational DAS rules were modified by DAS rules were set by No action needed.
General were modified an Admin user using the $ADMIN Restarting
Alert/Info by an Admin web admin tool. tns at $now
user. Incorrect
DAS rules
could cause an
issue with
dialing out of
system.
ADM-1008 DAS rules Informational DAS rules were modified by DAS rules were set by No action needed.
General were modified an Admin user using the $admin_name Sent
Alert/Info by an Admin web admin tool. tns DASRECONFIG
user. Incorrect message at $now
DAS rules
could cause an
issue with
dialing out of
system.
ADM-1008 TPDAS rules Informational TPDAS rules were modified TPDAS rules were set No action needed.
General were modified by an Admin user. by $admin_name
Alert/Info by an Admin Sent tns tpdas.reread
user. Incorrect message at $now
DAS rules
could cause an
issue with
dialing out of
system
8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008
through PSTN
board.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008
8AL90208USAD ed01
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

ADM-1009 Service offered Informational This alert is raised to Routing rules were None needed if this was
General Alert/ by the indicate that routing rules set by $admin_name a planned change.
Server Alert component is were set by the listed
functional. Admin user. Other typical
admin alerts include:
"new admin user created",
admin user X deleted",
"TCP/IP settings modified",
"PSTN settings modified",
"system options modified"
ALS-1001 Service offered Minor This alarm is raised if the Alarm server restart No immediate action
General Alarm / by the alarm server reconnects was finally successful required. Call Customer
Alcatel-Lucent component is after losing connection for at ' . $date . ' Support as soon as
Server Alarm now available any perio of time. possible, if service is in
use and this reoccurs
while this service is in
use.
ALS-3001 Service offered Minor This alarm is raised if the Alarm server restart Check that the service
General Alarm / by the Alarm server has lost at ' . $date . ' is currently running
Alcatel-Lucent component connection between the and monitor for any
Server Alarm was listed servers. further instances. Call
temporarily Customer Support as
unavailable. soon as possible if this
condition does not clear
itself within a few
minutes and this
service is in use.
ALS-7001 Service offered Informational/ This alarm is raised if the Alarm server restart Call Customer Support
General Alarm / by the Minor Alarm server has tried again at ' . $date . ' immediately if this
Alcatel-Lucent component is repeatedly to reconnect and Will not send more service is currently in
Server Alarm unavailable. has been unable to connect. mail until server use and the service does
restarts successfully' . not restart within 10
minutes.
BAK-1010 None Informational This message indicates the Backup of data on No immediate action
General data backup was `date` was successful required.
Alert/Info successful.
BAK-7010 Data backup Warning This message indicates the Backup of data on Manual data backup
General failed. data backup has failed. `date` failed. should be run and
Alert/Warning `/usr/local/apache/cgib automatic data backup
in/nightlybackup.errs tested for cause of
$result failure.
$BACKUP_HOST
$BACKUP_MODE`.
B-5

B-6
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BBM-1001 Service offered Informational This alert is raised if the Blackberry server No immediate action
General by the Blackberry server service restart was finally required. Call Customer
Alert/Alcatel- component is experiences a reset and has successful at ' . $date . Support as soon as
Lucent Server now available. returned to service. ' possible if service is in
Alert use and this occurs.
BBM-3001 Service offered Informational/ This alert is raised if the Blackberry server Check that the service
General by the Minor (depends Blackberry server service restart at is curently running and
Alert/Alcatel- component if component is experiences a reset. ' . $date . ' monitor for any further
Lucent Server was in use) instances. No
Alert temporarily immediate action
unavailable. required. Call Customer
Support as soon as
possible, if service is in
use and this reoccurs.
Pull BBMUX logs.
BBM-7001 Service offered Informational/ This alarm is raised if the Blackberry server Check that the service
General by the Major (depends Blackberry server service restart again at ' . is currently running.
Alarm/Alcatel- component is if component is experiences a reset and has $now_string . ' Will Monitor for any further
Lucent Server unavailable. in use) not yet restarted properly. not send more mail instances, no immediate
Alarm until server restarts action required. Call
successfully' . ' Customer Support as
soon as possible if this
service is currently used
and the service does not
restart within 10
minutes. Pull BBMUX
logs.
BCAST-1001 Service offered Informational This alert is raised if the Broadcast server No immediate action
General by the broadcast server service restart was finally required. Call Customer
Alert/Alcatel- component is experiences a reset and has successful ' . $date . ' Support as soon as
Lucent Server now available. returned to service. possible, if service is in
Alert use and this reoccurs.
BCAST-3001 Service offered Minor This alert is raised if the Broadcast server Check that the service
General by the broadcast server service restart at is currently running
Alert/Alcatel- component experiences a reset. ' . $date .' and monitor for any
Lucent Server was further instances. No
8AL90208USAD ed01

November 20, 2008
Support as soon as
possible if this reoccurs.
Pull broadcast logs.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008
8AL90208USAD ed01
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

BCAST-7001 Service offered Major This alarm is raised if the Broadcast server Call Customer Support
General by the broadcast server service restart again at ' . immediately if this
Alarm/Alcatel- component is experiences a reset and has $now_string . ' Will service is currently in
Lucent Server unavailable. not yet properly restarted. not send more mail use and the service does
Alarm until server restarts not restart within 10
successfully' .' minutes. Pull broadcast
logs.
BCL-1001 Service offered Informational This alert is raised if the Buddy console server No immediate action
General by the Buddy Console server restart was finally required. Call Customer
Alert/Alcatel- component is service experiences a reset successful at ' . $date . Support as soon as
Lucent Server now available. and has returned to service. ' possible, if service is in
BCL-3001 Service offered Major This alert is raised if the Buddy console server Check that the service
General by the Buddy Console server restart at ' . $date . ' is currently running
Alert/Alcatel- component service experiences a reset. and monitor for further
Lucent Server was Buddy Console is the instances. No
Alert temporarily MMIC web interface. immediate action
Support as soon as
Pull BuddyConsole logs.
BCL-7001 Service offered Critical This alarm is raised if the Buddy console server Call Customer Support
General by the Buddy Console server server restart again as soon as possible if
Alarm/Alcatel- component is service experiences a reset at ' . $now_string . ' this service is currently
Lucent Server unavailable. and has not yet restarted Will not send more in use and the service
Alarm properly. Buddy Console is mail until server does not restart within
the MMIC web interface. restarts successfully' . 10 minutes. Pull
' BuddyConsole logs.
CAL-1001 Service offered Informational This alert is raised if the Outgoing call restart No immediate action
General by the CAL server service was finally successful required. Call Customer
Alert/Alcatel- component is experiences a reset and has at ' . $date .' Support as soon as
Lucent Server now available. returned to service. possible , if service is in
CAL-3001 Service offered Critical This alert is raised if the Outgoing call server Check that the service
General by the CAL server service restart at is currently running
Alert/Alcatel- component experiences a reset. ' . $date .' and monitor for any
Support as soon as
Pull all logs.
B-7

B-8
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CAL-7001 Service offered Critical This alarm is raised if the Outgoing call server Call Customer Support
General by the CAL server service restart again at ' . immediately if this
Alarm/Alcatel- component is experiences a reset and has $date .' Will not send service is currently in
Lucent Server unavailable. not yet properly restarted. more mail until use and the service does
Alarm server restarts not restart within 10
successfully minutes. Pull all logs.
CDR-1001 Service offered Informational This alert is raised if the Call records server No immediate action
General by the Call records server service restart was finally required. Call Customer
Lucent Server now available. returned to service. ' possible , if service is in
CDR-3001 Service offered Informational This alert is raised if the Call records server Check that the service
General by the Call records server service restart at is currently running
Alert/Alcatel- component experiences a reset. ' . $date . ' and monitor for any
Support as soon as
CDR-7001 Service offered Minor This alarm is raised if the Call records server Call Customer Support
General by the Call records server service restart again at ' . as soon as possible if
Alarm/Alcatel- component is experiences a reset and has $date . ' Will not send this service is currently
Lucent Server unavailable. not yet properly restarted. more mail until in use and the service
Alarm This will effect CDR server restarts does not restart within
output. successfully' . 10 minutes.
DBJ-1001 Service offered Informationall This alert is raised if the dbjournal server No immediate action
General by the DBJournal server service restart was required. Call Customer
Alert/Alcatel- component is experiences a reset and has finally successful Support as soon as
Lucent Server now available. returned to service. This at ' . $date . ' possible , if service is in
Alert service is used especially in use and this reoccurs.
a redundant environment
to keep the databases in
synch.
DBJ-3001 Service offered Minor This alert is raised if the dbjournal server Check that the service
General by the DBJournal server service restart at is currently running
Alert/Alcatel- component experiences a reset. This ' . $date . ' and monitor for any
Lucent Server was service is used especially in further instances. No
8AL90208USAD ed01
temporarily a redundant environment immediate action

November 20, 2008
Alert
unavailable. to keep the databases in required. Call Customer
synch. Support as soon as
Pull dbjournal logs.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008
8AL90208USAD ed01
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

DBJ-4001 Service offered Minor or Major This alarm is raised to Description of error Gather DB logs and
General by the (depending on indicate the dbjournal appears. open a support ticket.
Alarm/Alcatel- component is error) process has detected an
Lucent Server affected. error. Typically, this will
Alarm refer to a backup failure, db
connect failure, or bad
formed file. These affect the
possible redundancy of a
stacked system and will
need to be checked.
DBJ-7001 Service offered Major This alarm is raised if the dbjournal server Call Customer Support
General by the DBJournal server service restart again at ' . as soon as possible if
Alarm This service is used server restarts does not restart within
especially in a redundant successfully' . ' 10 minutes. Pull
environment to keep the dbjournal logs.
databases in synch.
DBS-1001 Service offered Informational This alert is raised if the Database server No immediate action
General by the database server service restart was finally required. Call Customer
Lucent Server now available. returned to service. ' possible, if service is in
DBS-3001 Service offered Major This alert is raised if the Database server Check that the service
General by the Database server service restart at is currently running
Support as soon as
Pull all logs.
DBS-7001 Service offered Critical This alarm is raised if the Database server Call Customer Support
General by the database server service restart again at ' . immediately if this
Alarm/Alcatel- component is experiences a reset and has $date . ' Will not send service is currently in
successfully' . minutes. Pull all logs.
Disk Space Alert Storage on Informational This alert is raised if the Warning: The Check to see what can
General server is disk space on the listed partition mounted at be removed to free up
Alert/Alcatel- affected. partition exceeds a defined $mount has exceeded space.
Lucent Server threshold. $warning_threshold\
Alert % capacity\n
B-9

B-10
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Disk Space Alert N/A Informational This alert is raised if the Partition $mount has No action required.
General disk space on the listed returned below
Alert/Alcatel- partition returns below a $warning_threshold\
Lucent Server predefined threshold. % capacity.\n
Alert
Disk Space Storage on Major This alert is raised if the Critical Warning: The Check to see what can
Critical Alert server is disk space on the listed partition mounted at be removed to free up
General affected. partition exceeds a second $mount has exceeded space ASAP.
Alert/Alcatel- (critical) defined threshold. $critical_threshold\%
Lucent Server: capacity.\n
Disk space
Critical
DMCU-3001 Service offered Critical This alert is raised if the Desktopmcu server Call Customer Support
General by the Desktop MCU server restart at as soon as possible if
Alert/Alcatel- component service experiences a reset. ' . $date . ' this reoccurs. Pull
Lucent Server was desktop mcu logs.
Alert temporarily
unavailable.
DMCU-3001 Service offered Critical This alert is raised if the SNMP server restart Call Customer Support
General by the SNMP server service at as soon as possible if
Alert/Alcatel- component experiences a reset. ' . $date . ' this reoccurs. Pull
Lucent Server was SNMP logs.
Alert temporarily
unavailable.
DMCU-7001 Service offered Major This alarm is raised if the Desktopmcu server Call Customer Support
General by the desktop mcu server service restart again at ' . as soon as possible if
Alarm server restarts does not restart within
successfully' . ' 10 minutes.
DMCU-7001 Service offered Major This alarm is raised if the Snmp server restart Call Customer Support
General by the SNMP server service again at ' . $date . ' immediately if this
Alarm/Alcatel- component is experiences a reset and has Will not send more service is currently in
Lucent Server unavailable. not yet properly restarted. mail until server use and the service does
Alarm restarts successfully' . not restart within 10
' minutes. Pull SNMP
logs.
8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008
8AL90208USAD ed01
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

DMCU-1001 Service offered Minor This alert is raised if the Desktopmcu restart No immediate action
General by the desktopmcu server service was finally successful required. Call Customer
Alert/Alcatel- component is experiences a reset and has at ' . $date . ' Support as soon as
DMCU-1001 Service offered Minor This alert is raised if the Snmp server restart No immediate action
General by the snmp server service was finally successful required. Call Customer
IRP-1001 Service offered Informational This alert is raised if the IRP server restart No immediate action
General by the IRP server service was finally successful required. Call Customer
Alert/Alcatel- component is experiences a reset and has at ' . $date .' Support as soon as
Lucent Server now available. returned to service possible, if service is in
IRP-3001 Service offered Minor (depends This alert is raised if the IRP server restart at Check that the service
General by the if component is IRP server service ' . $date .' is currently running
Alert/Alcatel- component in use) experiences a reset. This and monitor for any
Lucent Server was effects Internet Rich further instances. No
Alert temporarily Presence. immediate action
Support as soon as
Pull IRP logs.
IRP-7001 Service offered Minor (depends This alarm is raised if the IRP server restart Call Customer Support
General by the if component is IRP server service again at ' . $date .' immediately if this
Alarm/Alcatel- component is in use) experiences a reset and has Will not send more service is currently in
Lucent Server unavailable. not yet properly restarted. mail until server use and the service does
Alarm restarts successfully not restart within 10
minutes. Pull IRP logs.
IVR-1001 Service offered Informational This alert is raised if the Incoming call server No immediate action
General by the IVR/Incoming call server restart was finally required. Call Customer
Alert/Alcatel- component is service experiences a reset successful at Support as soon as
Lucent Server now available. and has returned to service. ' . $date . ' possible, if service is in
Alert This service is the IVR and use and this reoccurs.
voice prompt engine of the
server.
B-11

B-12
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IVR-3001 Service offered Major This alert is raised if the Incoming call server Check that the service
General by the IVR/Incoming call server restart at is currently running
Alert/Alcatel- component service experiences a reset. ' . $date . ' and monitor for any
Lucent Server was This service is the IVR and further instances. No
Alert temporarily voice prompt engine of the immediate action
unavailable. server. required. Call Customer
Support as soon as
Pull IVR logs.
IVR-7001 Service offered Critical This alarm is raised if the Incoming call server Call Customer Support
General by the IVR/Incoming call server restart again at ' . as soon as possible if
Alarm/Alcatel- component is service experiences a reset $date . ' Will not send this service is currently
Lucent Server unavailable. and has not yet properly more mail until in use and the service
Alarm restarted. This service is server restarts does not restart within
the IVR and voice prompt successfully' 10 minutes. Pull IVR
engine of the server. logs.
LIC-4001 Service offered Minor This alarm is raised if the License expiring in Contact your sales or
General Alert / by the License in use by the $daysleft days support representative
Alcatel-Lucent component is system is set to expire in a to obtain a new license
Server Alert running but certain number of days. immediately.
may be
impacted soon.
LIC-7001 Informational The license for server Contact your Alcatel-
General will expire on ' . $date Lucent service
Alert/Alcatel- . ' Please contact your representative.
Lucent Server Alcatel-Lucent
Alert service
representative.
(e.g., The license for
dev01.dev.edial.office
will expire on Sun,
01-Apr-2007. Please
contact your Alcatel-
Lucent service
representative.)
8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008
8AL90208USAD ed01
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

LIC-7001 Informational The license for server Contact your Alcatel-
General expired on ' . $date . ' Lucent service
Alert/Alcatel- Please contact your representative.
Lucent Server Alcatel-Lucent
Alert service
representative.
(e.g., The license for
dev01.dev.edial.office
expired on Sun, 01-
Apr-2007. Please
contact your Alcatel-
Lucent service
representative.)
LIC-7003 Service offered Critical This alarm is raised if the License expired. Contact your sales or
General Alarm / by the License in use by the support representative
Alcatel-Lucent component is system has expired. to obtain a new license
Server Alarm affected. to restore server
System functionality.
functionality
affected.
MAIL-3001 Service offered Informational This alert is raised if the Mail server restart at Check that the service
General by the mail server service ' . $date . ' is currently running
Alert/Alcatel- component experiences a reset. This and monitor for any
Lucent Server was service is used to send further instances. No
Alert temporarily email alerts immediate action is
Support as soon as
MAIL-7001 Service offered Minor This alarm is raised if the Mail server restart Call Customer Support
General by the mail server service again at as soon as possible if
Alarm/Alcatel- component is experiences a reset and has ' . $date . ' Will not this service is currently
Lucent Server unavailable. not yet properly restarted. send more mail until in use and the service
Alarm This service is used to send server restarts does not restart within
email alerts. successfully' 10 minutes.
MCU-1001 Service offered Informational This alert is raised if the Conference server No immediate action
General by the Conference server service restart was finally required. Call Customer
Lucent Server now available. returned to service. This ' possible, if service is in
Alert service is the actual use and this reoccurs.
conference/mixing engine of
the server.
B-13

B-14
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MCU-3001 Service offered Critical This alert is raised if the Conference server Call Customer Support
General by the Conference server service restart at as soon as possible if
Alert/Alcatel- component experiences a reset. This ' . $date . ' this reoccurs.
Lucent Server was service is the actual
Alert temporarily conference/mixing engine of
unavailable. the server.
MCU-7001 Service offered Critical This alarm is raised if the Conference server Call Customer Support
General by the Conference server service restart again at ' . immediately if this
Lucent Server unavailable. not yet properly started. more mail until use and the service does
Alarm This service is the actual server restarts not restart within 10
conference/mixing engine of successfully' minutes.
the server.
MGW-1001 Service offered Informational This alert is raised if the MGW restart was No immediate action
General by the MGW server service finally successful at ' . required. Call Customer
Alert/Alcatel- component is experiences a reset and has $date .' Support as soon as
MGW-3001 Service offered Major This alert is raised if the MGW server restart Check that the service
General by the MGW service server at ' . $date .' is currently running
Alert/Alcatel- component experiences a reset. This and monitor for any
Lucent Server was effects Microsoft Mobile further instances. No
Alert temporarily Gateway. immediate action
Support as soon as
Pull MS Mobile
Gateway logs.
MGW-7001 Service offered Critical This alarm is raised if the MGW server restart Call Customer Support
General by the (depends if MGW server service again at ' . $date .' immediately if this
Alarm/Alcatel- component is component is in experiences a reset and has Will not send more service is currently in
Lucent Server unavailable. use) not yet properly restarted. mail until server use and the service does
Alarm This effects Microsoft restarts successfully not restart within 10
Mobile Gateway minutes. Pull MS
Mobile Gateway logs.
MID-1001 Service offered Informational This alert is raised if the MID server restart No immediate action
General by the Microsoft Office was finally successful required. Call Customer
8AL90208USAD ed01
component is Communicator Gateway at ' . $date .' Support as soon as

November 20, 2008
Alert/Alcatel-
Lucent Server now available. server service experiences a possible, if service is in
Alert reset and has returned to use and this reoccurs.
service.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008
8AL90208USAD ed01
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

MID-3001 Service offered Major (depends This alert is raised if the MID server restart at Check that the service
General by the if component is Microsoft Office ' . $date .' is currently running
Alert/Alcatel- component in use) Communicator Gateway. and monitor for any
Lucent Server was server service experiences a further instances. No
Alert temporarily reset. This effects Microsoft immediate action
unavailable. Office Communicator required. Call Customer
Gateway. Support as soon as
Pull MS Office
Communicator Gateway
logs.
MID-7001 Service offered Critical This alarm is raised if the MID server restart Call Customer Support
General by the (depends if MS Communicator again at ' . $date .' immediately if this
Alarm/Alcatel- component is component is in Gateway server service Will not send more service is currently in
Lucent Server unavailable use) experiences a reset and has mail until server use and the service does
Alarm not yet properly restarted. restarts successfully. not restart within 10
This effects Microsoft Office minutes. Pull MS Office
Communicator Gateway Communicator Gateway
clients. logs.
MUX-1001 Service offered Informational This alert is raised if the SIP multiplexor No immediate action
General by the SIP Multiplexor restart was finally required. Call Customer
Lucent Server now available. returned to service. ' possible, if service is in
MUX-3001 Service offered Critical This alert is raised if the SIP multiplexor Check that the service
General by the SIP Multiplexor service restart at is currently running
Support as soon as
The SIP subsystem is a
critical component of
this server. Pull THS
and TNS logs.
B-15

B-16
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MUX-7001 Service offered Critical This alarm is raised if the SIP multiplexor Call Customer Support
General by the SIP Multiplexor restart again at ' . immediately if this
successfully' minutes. The SIP
subsystem is a critical
component of this
server. Pull THS and
TNS logs.
NTP-3001 Service offered Minor This alert is raised if the No NTP service. Check that the service
General by the NTP/time server service Restarting time is currently running
Alert/Alcatel- component experiences a reset. service at ' . $date . ' and monitor for any
Support as soon as
This service is used to
keep time and date
correct. Critical in
stacked/redundant
environments.
NTP-7001 Service offered Major This alarm is raised if the Still no responding Call Customer Support
General by the NTPO/time server service NTP connections. as soon as possible if
Alarm/Alcatel- component is experiences a reset and has Restarting time this service is currently
Lucent Server unavailable. not yet properly restarted. service again at ' . in use and the service
Alarm $date . ' Will not send does not restart within
more mail until 10 minutes. This service
server restarts is used to keep the time
successfully' . ' and date correct.
Critical in
stacked/redundant
environments.
8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008
8AL90208USAD ed01
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

NTP-1001 Service offered Informational This alert is raised if the NTP restart was No immediate action
General by the NTP/time server service finally successful at ' . required. Call Customer
Alert/Alcatel- component is experiences a reset and has $date . ' Support as soon as
This service is used to
keep the time and date
correct. Critical in
stacked/redundant
environments.
NTPD-1001 Service offered Minor This alarm is raised if the Service restart was No immediate action
General Alarm / by the Network Time Protocol finally successful at ' . required. Verify
Alcatel-Lucent component is service was affected $date . ' connectivity with NTP
Server Alarm now available. (unable to connect). source. Call Customer
Support as soon as
possible if this reoccurs
and connectivity shows
OK.
PS-1001 Informational Process sessions
General server restart was
Alert/Alcatel- finally successful at ' .
Lucent Server $date .'
Alert
PS-3001 Informational Process sessions
General server restart at ' .
Alert/Alcatel- $date .'
Lucent Server
Alert
PS-7001 Major Process sessions
General server restart again
Alarm/Alcatel- at ' . $date .' Will not
Lucent Server send more mail until
Alarm server restarts
successfully.
SENDMAIL- Service offered Informational This alert is raised if the Mail server restart No immediate action
1001 by the send mail server service was finally successful required. Call Customer
General component is experiences a reset and has at ' . $date . ' Support as soon as
Alert/Alcatel- now available. returned to service. This possible, if service is in
Lucent Server service is used to send use and this reoccurs.
Alert email alerts.
B-17

B-18
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SLI-1001 Service offered Informational This alert is raised if the Document pre- No immediate action
General by the Document pre-processor processor restart was required. Call Customer
Alert/Alcatel- component is server service experiences a finally successful at ' . Support as soon as
Lucent Server now available. reset and has returned to $date .' possible, if service is in
Alert service. use and this reoccurs.
SLI-3001 Service offered Minor This alert is raised if the Document pre- Check that the service
General by the Document pre-processor processor server is currently running
Alert/Alcatel- component server service experiences a restart at ' . $date .' and monitor for any
Lucent Server was reset. This affects further instances. No
Alert temporarily Presentation Sahring. immediate action
Support as soon as
SLI-7001 Service offered Major This alarm is raised if the Document pre- Call Customer Support
General by the Document pre-processor processor server immediately if this
Alarm/Alcatel- component is server service experiences a restart again at ' . service is currently in
Lucent Server unavailable. reset and has not yet $date .' Will not send use and the service does
Alarm properly restarted. more mail until not restart within 10
server restarts minutes. This effect the
successfully ability to share
presentations.
STK-1001 Service offered Minor This alarm is raised if the Stack connection from No immediate action
General by the stacking connection has ’.$node_id.’ to ’ required. Call Customer
Alarm/Alcatel- component is been restored after a period .$node.’ was finally Support as soon as
Lucent Server now available. of disconnect. successful at ‘.$date.’ possible, if service is in
Alarm use and this reoccurs.
STK-3001 Service offered Major This alarm is raised if the Stack connection from Check that the service
General by the stacking has lost ' . $node_id . ' to ' . is currently running
Alarm/Alcatel- component connection between the $node . ' is down. and monitor for any
Lucent Server was listed servers. Status is ' . further instances. Call
Alarm temporarily $stackstatus . ' at ' . Customer Support as
unavailable. $date . ' soon as possible if this
condition does not clear
itself within a few
minutes.
8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008
8AL90208USAD ed01
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

STK-7001 Service offered Major This alarm is raised if the Stack connection from Call Customer Support
General by the stack has tried repeatedly ' . $node_id . ' to ' . immediately if this
Alarm/Alcatel- component is to reconnect and has been $node . ' is still down. service is currently in
Lucent Server unavailable. unable to connect. Status is ' . use and the service does
Alarm $stackstatus . ' at ' . not restart within 10
$date . ' Will not send minutes.
any more mail until
connection is
successful.
SWRAID-3001 Service offered Major OEM specific alarm “‘echo” “|cat - Contact Technical
General by the (Shoretel). This alarm is /tmp/mdfailure’” Support immediately.
Alarm/Server component is raised to indicate software-
Alarm affected. based RAID failure.
THS-1001 Service offered Informational This alert is raised if the SIP server restart No immediate action
General by the SIP server service was finally successful required. Call Customer
THS-3001 Service offered Critical This alert is raised if the SIP server restart at ' Check that the service
General by the SIP server service . $date . ' is currently running
Alert/Alcatel- component experiences a reset. and monitor for any
Support as soon as
The SIP subsystem is a
critical component of
this server. Pull THS
and TNS logs.
THS-7001 Service offered Critical This alarm is raised if the SIP server restart Call Customer Support
General by the SIP server service again at ' . immediately if this
Alarm/Alcatel- component is experiences a reset and has $now_string . ' Will service is currently in
Lucent Server unavailable. not yet properly restarted. not send more mail use and the service does
successfully' . minutes. The SIP
subsystem is a critical
component of this
server. Pull THS and
TNS logs.
B-19

B-20
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TNS-1001 Service offered Informational This alert is raised if the Outgoing call server No immediate action
General by the Outgoing Call server restart was finally required. Call Customer
Alert/Alcatel- component is experiences a reset and has successful at Support as soon as
Lucent Server now available. returned to service. ' . $date . ' possible, if service is in
TNS-3001 Service offered Critical This alert is raised if the Outgoing call server Check that the service
General by the Outgoing Call server restart at ' . $date . ' is currently running
Lucent Server was further instances. Call
Alert temporarily Customer Support as
reoccurs. Pull TNS logs.
TNS-7001 Service offered Critical This alarm is raised if the Outgoing call server Call Customer Support
General by the Outgoing Call server restart again at ' . immediately if this
successfully' minutes. Pull TNS logs.
TP-4001 Service offered Critical This alarm is raised to TP-260 card has old Contact Technical
General by the indicate the PSTN board feature key. Support immediately.
Alarm/Server & component is installed in the server is
Trunk Alarm affected. not compatible with the
currently running version
of code.
TPS-1002 Service offered Informational This alarm is raised to ' . $mailmsg . ' No immediate action
General by the indicate line coding on the required.
Alarm/Trunk component indicated PSTN span is
Alarm was restored.
temporarily
unavailable.
TPS-2001 Service offered Informational This alert is raised when a %d ports are No immediate action
Trunk by the predetermined port currently in use %d required.
Alert/Alcatel- component is threshold has been ports are free at
Lucent Trunk available at reached. %s ' . $mailmsg . '
Alert this capacity.
TPS-2005 Service offered Informational This alert is generated to ' . $mailmsg . ' No immediate action
8AL90208USAD ed01
by the indicate Alternative Video required.

November 20, 2008
General
Alert/Alcatel component is MCU is now in use.
Server Alert now available.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008
8AL90208USAD ed01
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TPS-2006 Service offered Informational This alert is generated to ' . $mailmsg . ' No immediate action
General by the indicate Primary Video required.
Alert/Alcatel component is MCU is now in use.
Server Alert now available.
TPS-3001 Service offered Critical This alert is raised if the Phone trunk server Check that the service
Trunk by the Phone Trunk server service restart is currently running
Alert/Alcatel- component experiences a reset. at ' . $date . ' and monitor for any
Lucent Trunk was further instances. Call
Alert temporarily Customer Support as
reoccurs. Pull logs and
check PSTN
connectivity.
TPS-3005 Service offered Informational This alert is raised when a ' . $portsfree . ' port(s) No immediate action
Trunk by the predetermined port are now free at ' . required.
Alarm/Alcatel- component is threshold has been $date . '
Lucent Trunk available at reached.
Alarm this capacity.
TPS-7001 Service offered Critical This alarm is raised if the Phone trunk server Call Customer Support
Trunk by the Phone Trunk server restart again at ' . immediately if this
Lucent Trunk unavailable. not yet properly restarted. more mail until use and the service does
successfully' minutes. Pull logs and
check PSTN
connectivity.
TPS-7001 Service offered Critical This alarm is PSTN trunk ' . $mailmsg . ' Call Customer Support
Trunk by the related. immediately if this
Alarm/Alcatel- component is service is currently in
Lucent Trunk affected. use and the service does
Alarm not restart within 10
minutes. Pull logs and
check PSTN
connectivity.
TPS-7001 Service offered Major This alarm is raised if there trunk line(s) Pull logs and check
Trunk by the are PSTN connectivity $linecode went down ' PSTN connectivity.
Alarm/Alcatel- component is issues on the PSTN board. . $now_string . '
Lucent Trunk affected.
Alarm
B-21

B-22
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TPS-7001 Service offered Major This alarm is raised to trunk line(s) Investigate the PSTN
General by the indicate line coding on the $linecode went down ' connection, contact
Alarm/Alcatel- component is indicated PSTN span is . $now_string . ' PSTN service provider
Lucent Trunk affected. down. for confirmation of
Alarm which side of circuit the
issue resides.
TPS-7005 Service offered Critical This alarm is raised if there NO ports available at Pull logs and check
Trunk by the are outbound connectivity ' . $date . ' outbound connectivity
Alarm/Alcatel- component has issues or all ports are in and capacity.
Lucent Trunk been affected. use.
Alarm
TPS-7006 Service offered Critical This alarm is raised if there NO port available at ' Pull logs and check
Trunk by the are outbound connectivity . $date . ' Will not outbound connectivity
Alarm/Alcatel- component has issues or all ports are in use send more mail until and capacity.
Lucent Trunk been affected. and service has not been at least one port is
Alarm restored. available' . '
TPS-8001 Service offered Critical This alarm is rasied if there No operational voice Pull logs and check
Trunk by the are PSTN connectivity lines at PSTN connectivity.
Alarm/Alcatel- component has issues on the PSTN board. ' . $date . '
Lucent Trunk been affected.
Alarm
TPS-8002 Service offered Critical This alarm is rasied if there No operational voice Pull logs and check
Trunk by the are PSTN connectivity lines still at ' . $date . PSTN connectivity.
Alert/Alcatel- component has issues on the PSTN board ' Will not send more
Lucent Trunk been affected. and service has not been mail until at least one
Alert restored. phone trunk is
operational' .
UPG-1001 Service offered Informational This alert is raised if the Http server restart No immediate action
General by the web server service was finally successful required. Call Customer
Alert/Alcatel- component is experiences a reset. at ' . $date . ' Support as soon as
Lucent Server now available. possible, if service is in
8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008
8AL90208USAD ed01
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

UPG-3001 Service offered Minor This alert is raised if the Http server restart at Check that the service
General by the web server service ' . $date . ' is currently running
Support as soon as
Pull all logs.
UPG-7001 Service offered Critical This alarm is raised if the Http server restart Call Customer Support
General by the web server service again at ' . immediately if this
Alarm/Alcatel- component is $now_string . ' Will service is currently in
Lucent Server unavailable. not send more mail use and the service does
successfully' minutes. Pull all logs.
B-23

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-24 8AL90208USAD ed01
Issue ed 01 November 20, 2008

C Voice Prompts
Overview
Purpose
This table presents the list of voice prompts.
Alcatel-Lucent uses the following companies to record voice prompts:
US English: GM Voices
(Emily persona)
www.gmvoices.com
Other languages: Lionbridge
www.lionbridge.com
Table C-1 Voice Prompt List
00 To turn off the music, press one.

01 Welcome to the Alcatel-Lucent Conference Center.
02 Enter an access code, then press pound. To cancel, press
star.
03 Cancelled. Please try again.
04 That access code isn’t recognized-please try again.
05 That access code isn’t recognized.
06 To enter another code, press star.
07 To enter another code, press star, or to end this call, press
pound.
08 To enter another code, press star, or for assistance, press
zero.
09 At the tone, say your name and then press pound.
<beep>
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 C-1
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 The leader hasn’t activated this call yet. Please stay on the
line.
11 Thank you for using the Alcatel-Lucent conference
center. Goodbye.
12 One moment while your call is connected.
13 That conference hasn’t started yet.
14 That conference has already ended.
15 That conference isn’t available now.
16 I'm sorry, the operator isn’t available now.
17 You’re the only person in this conference. Please stay on
the line.
18 Sorry, we’re unable to complete your call.
19 That person isn’t available right now.
20 Zero
21 One
22 Two
23 Three
24 Four
25 Five
26 Six
27 Seven
28 Eight
29 Nine
30 One moment, please.
31 All circuits are busy. Please try again in a few minutes.
32 At any time, you may press the pound key twice for a list of
options.
33 The recording has ended. To start again, press one.
Otherwise, you may hang up.
34 Paused. To resume, press 2
35 Recordings
36 You have been invited to a conference call. To join, press
1. To decline, press 2.
37 Invitation declined. Goodbye
38 Record your message at the tone. When you have finished,
press pound. <beep>
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
C-2 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
39 Recording saved.
40 For a list of names, press 3.
41 To place a call, press 2
42 Names are not available.
43 To return to the conference, press star.
44 Sorry, that’s not a recognized option.
45 Sorry, that option isn’t available.
46 Returning to conference.
47 Do you want to keep this call? To keep the call and return
to the conference, press 1. To drop the call and return,
press 2.
48 That number is busy.
49 To return to the conference, press star. To try another
number, press 1.
50 I’m sorry. The call leader hasn’t given approval for you to
join this conference. Goodbye.
51 The person you called is no longer on the line.
52 Sorry, we couldn’t complete your call. Be sure to dial one
and the area code. For international numbers, you must
include the country code.
53 Now joining…
54 I’m not sure if you recorded a name. To keep this
recording, press 1. To try again, press 2.
55 Sorry, I still didn’t hear you say a name. You can’t join the
conference until you record your name. To try again, press
1.
56 There’s no answer at that number.
57 Ready to place a call. To return to the conference at any
time, press the star key twice.
58 Sorry, I didn’t hear you say a name.
59 Recording cancelled.
60 Names. To cancel the list at any time, press star.
61 To return to the conference, press star. To repeat the list,
press 1.
62 Cancelled.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
63 North America only: Enter a phone number including

one and the area code. For international calls, be sure to
include the country code. When you have finished, press
pound.
Europe and Asia: Enter a phone number, and then press
pound.
64 Cancelled. You may dial another number now, or to return
to the conference, press star.
65 Sorry, we’re unable to call that number. You may dial
another number now, or to return to the conference, press
star.
66 North America only: Sorry, that phone number isn’t
valid. Be sure to dial one and the area code. For
international numbers, you must include the country
code.
Europe and Asia: Sorry, that phone number isn’t valid.
You may have to include the country code in your number.
67 There are…
68 …people in this call
69 Ten
70 Eleven
71 Twelve
72 Thirteen
73 Fourteen
74 Fifteen
75 Sixteen
76 Seventeen
77 Eighteen
78 Nineteen
79 Twenty
80 Thirty
81 Forty
82 Fifty
83 Sixty
84 Seventy
85 Eighty
86 Ninety
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
87 Hundred
88 Options.
89 The call has been dropped.
90 There is one person in this call.
91 To mute your line, press 1.
92 To un-mute your line, press 1.
93 To hear the number of callers, press 3.
94 To return to the conference, press star now. Otherwise,
select from the following options.
95 Names.
96 All circuits are busy. Please try your call again in a few
minutes.
97 This call is being recorded.
98 The recording has been stopped.
99 Please try your call again in a few minutes
100 (join earcon)
101 (leave earcon)
102 (mute earcon)
103 (un-mute earcon)
104 The leader has locked this conference.
105 You have a message. To hear the message, press 1. To
decline, press 2.
106 If you are satisfied with the recording, you may hang up
now. To erase and re-record, press 1. To listen to the
recording, press 2.
107 To speak to an operator, press 0.
108 Please hold for an operator.
109 (tone)
110 (tone)
111 …twenty one…
112 …twenty two…
113 …twenty three…
114 …twenty four…
115 …twenty five…
116 …twenty six…
117 …twenty seven…
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
118 …twenty eight…

119 …twenty nine…
120 …thirty one…
121 …thirty two…
122 …thirty three…
123 …thirty four…
124 …thirty five…
125 …thirty six…
126 …thirty seven…
127 …thirty eight…
128 …thirty nine…
129 …forty one…
130 …forty two…
131 …forty three…
132 …forty four…
133 …forty five…
134 …forty six…
135 …forty seven…
136 …forty eight…
137 …forty nine…
138 …fifty one…
139 … fifty two…
140 …fifty three…
141 …fifty four…
142 …fifty five…
143 …fifty six…
144 …fifty seven…
145 …fifty eight…
146 …fifty nine…
147 …sixty one…
148 …sixty two…
149 …sixty three…
150 …sixty four…
151 …sixty five…
152 …sixty six…
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
153 …sixty seven…

154 …sixty eight…
155 …sixty nine…
156 …seventy one…
157 …seventy two…
158 …seventy three…
159 …seventy four…
160 …seventy five…
161 …seventy six…
162 …seventy seven…
163 …seventy eight…
164 …seventy nine…
165 …eighty one…
166 …eighty two…
167 …eighty three…
168 …eighty four…
169 …eighty five…
170 …eighty six…
171 …eighty seven…
172 …eighty eight…
173 …eighty nine…
174 …ninety one…
175 …ninety two…
176 …ninety three…
177 …ninety four…
178 …ninety five…
179 …ninety six…
180 …ninety seven…
181 …ninety eight…
182 …ninety nine…
183 …one hundred…
184 …over one hundred…
185 The recording’s duration is…
186 …hour…
187 …hours…
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
188 …minute…
189 …minutes…
190 …and…
191 …second…
192 …seconds…
193 At the leader’s request, your line has been muted.
194 At the leader’s request, this line cannot be un-muted.
195 To unmute your line during the conference, press pound
pound one.
196 (10 msec of silence)
197 This conference is scheduled to end in fifteen minutes.
198 This conference is scheduled to end in ten minutes.
199 This conference is scheduled to end in five minutes.
200 This conference will end in two minutes.
201 The leader has left the call. At the leader’s request, this
conference will now end.
202 This conference has ended.
203 You have been invited to a conference call.
204 To join, press 1. To decline, press 2.
205 This conference will end in fifteen minutes.
206 This conference will end in ten minutes.
207 This conference will end in five minutes.
208 Enter your identification number, then press pound.
209 Enter your password, then press pound.
210 The login information you entered is not correct.
211 For other options, press pound.
212 Main menu. To schedule a broadcast, press 1. To re-record
a recording, press 2. To delete a recording, press 3.
213 To use an existing recording, press 1. To make a new
recording, press 2. (1 second pause) To return to the main
menu, press star.
214 Enter the number of the recording that you want to
broadcast, then press pound.
215 Enter the Recipient List Number.
216 To start the broadcast now, press 1. To schedule it to start
later, press 2.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
217 Enter six digits, for the day, month and year that you want
the broadcast to start. For example, if you wanted March
15, 2006, you would enter “zero three, one five, zero six”
218 You did not enter a valid date.
219 Enter four digits, for the time in your desktop’s time zone
that you want the broadcast to begin. For the hour, use
two digits to enter a number between zero and twenty
three. Then, enter two digits for the minute. For example,
if you want one PM, enter “one, three” for the hour, and
“zero, zero” for the minute.
220 You did not enter a valid time.
221 The date and time that you entered have already passed.
222 Enter the number of hours that this broadcast should run,
followed by pound. The number should be no more
than…
224 Here are the details of your broadcast.
225 Recording number….
226 List number…
227 Starting now.
228 Starting on...
229 Running for...
230 Thousand
231 January
232 February
233 March
234 April
235 May
236 June
237 July
238 August
239 September
240 October
241 November
242 December
243 To confirm this broadcast, press 1. To cancel the
broadcast, press 2.
244 Your broadcast has been scheduled.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
245 I’m sorry. Your broadcast could not be scheduled.

246 Enter the number of the recording you want to delete.
248 To delete this recording, press 1. To cancel, press two.
249 The recording was deleted.
250 I’m sorry, but the recording could not be deleted.
251 Enter the number of the recording that you want
to re-record.
252 To re-record this recording, press 1.
To cancel, press two.
253 To schedule the broadcast to start later, press 1. To start it
now, press 2.
254 ….at…
255 If this is correct, press 1. To enter a different date, press
two.
256 If this is correct, press 1. To enter a different time, press
two.
257 Broadcast cancelled
258 That recording number isn’t recognized. Please try again.
259 That list number isn’t recognized. Please try again.
260 To return to the main menu, press 1.
To continue, press 2.
261 To erase and re-record, press 1. To listen to the recording,
press 2. If you are satisfied with the recording, press 3.
262 AM.
263 PM.
264 O’clock
265 Midnight
266 Noon
267 If this is correct, press 1. To try again, press 2.
(gap)
270 Recording number...
271 That number is too high. Enter a number that is no more
than…
272 Zero is not a valid response. Your broadcast will run for
one hour.
273 You entered…
274 To repeat the number, press 1. To continue, press 2.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
275 For recordings, press 4.

276 This call is being recorded. To stop the recording, press 1.
To return to the conference without stopping, press 2.
277 To record this call, press 1. To return to the conference
without recording, press 2.
278 The recording will be stored in the account of the person
who owns the conference.
279 Your line has been muted.
280 Your conference has started.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

D NTP Servers
Overview
Purpose
This appendix presents the available NTP servers.
NTP Servers: US
The Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch Advanced Communications Server requires an external
time reference to maintain the accuracy of its system clock. If you do not run a NTP server
within your organization, you may use one of the publicly accessible time servers used by
the NIST Internet Time Service (ITS). The OmniTouch ACS server ships with
us.pool.ntp.org as the default. This is an NTP round robin, giving a different NTP server
with each access. This assures that if one NTP server is unavailable, another will be
accessed.
However, if you prefer to use a single NTP server, the table below lists publicly accessible
servers. It was obtained at http://www.boulder.nist.gov/timefreq/service/time-servers.html
Table D-1 NTP Servers: US
Name IP Address Location

time-a.nist.gov 129.6.15.28 NIST, Gaithersburg, Maryland
time-b.nist.gov 129.6.15.29 NIST, Gaithersburg, Maryland
time-a.timefreq.bldrdoc.gov 132.163.4.101 NIST, Boulder, Colorado
time-b.timefreq.bldrdoc.gov 132.163.4.102 NIST, Boulder, Colorado
time-c.timefreq.bldrdoc.gov 132.163.4.103 NIST, Boulder, Colorado
utcnist.colorado.edu 128.138.140.44 University of Colorado, Boulder
time.nist.gov 192.43.244.18 NCAR, Boulder, Colorado
time-nw.nist.gov 131.107.1.10 Microsoft, Redmond, Washington
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 D-1
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
nist1.symmetricom.com 69.25.96.13 Symmetricom, San Jose,

California
nist1-dc.glassey.com 216.200.93.8 Abovenet, Virginia
nist1-ny.glassey.com 208.184.49.9 Abovenet, New York City
nist1-sj.glassey.com 207.126.98.204 Abovenet, San Jose, California
nist1.aol-ca.truetime.com 207.200.81.113 TrueTime, AOL facility, Sunnyvale,
California
nist1.aol-va.truetime.com 64.236.96.53 TrueTime, AOL facility, Virginia
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
D-2 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

E Serial Console Interface:
Administrative Functions
Overview
Purpose
This appendix describes other administrative tasks that can be performed from the console
(serial port or video monitor) interface. Generally, it is not necessary to use the console to
perform these tasks – they are typically performed from the browser-based interface.
However, should you experience problems accessing the browser-based system
administrator’s application, these console functions can help address configuration issues
that affect proper system operation.
Contents
This appendix covers the following topics.
Topics:
Serial console menu E-2
Change password E-3

Reset certificate/key pair E-3
Revert server software E-3
Restore configuration E-3
Reset web administrator password E-4
Restart server E-4
Shutdown server E-4
End configuration session E-4
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 E-1
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Serial console menu

The console application is present on the serial port and video/keyboard when the server is
booted up. It requires logging in using the same administrator ID and password used by the
browser administration application, after which its menu appears.
Figure E-1 Serial Console Menu
If there is a plus sign “+” at the bottom of the frame, that indicates that there are more
menu items; use the up/down arrow keys to scroll through the menu.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E-2 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Change password
This option is used to change the password to the serial port console (not the browser-
based administration interface). The username remains admin.
Figure E-2 Change Password
Reset certificate/key pair

This option is used to reset the certificate/key pair to the original that shipped with the
server. Generally, if you have installed your own security certificate, you will not use this
option.
Revert server software

This option is used to re-install the most recently installed version of OmniTouch ACS
software (the version which is currently running). This process also erases all stored data
and restores the configuration to the default. Generally, if you have applied updates or
upgrades, you should not use this option.
Restore configuration
This option restores the server configuration to its initial “factory” settings. If you have
applied configuration changes (server host/domain name, IP address, and more)
appropriate to your network environment, you should not use this option.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 E-3
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reset web administrator password

This option allows you to reset the default administrator’s password in the browser
interface. The default is the word c ha n ge me . You would use this option if, for example,
an administrator changes the administrator’s password and then forgets what that changed
password is.
Note: For some customer deployments, this feature has been removed.
Restart server
This option reboots the server. During this process, all calls in progress are disconnected.
Shutdown server
This option performs a graceful shutdown of the server in preparation for turning it off (for
example, disconnecting the AC power connection). During shutdown, any calls in
progress are disconnected.
End configuration session

This option ends the serial port administrator’s system configuration session. For security
purposes, you should perform this step whenever you are through performing
administrative tasks through the console interface.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E-4 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

F Cookie Domains
Overview
Purpose
This appendix discusses the importance of properly setting up your web browser to accept
cookies that allow the Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch My Teamwork server to operate.
Contents
This appendix covers the following topics.
Cookie basics F-1
Cookie administration for ACS F-2
Cookie mis-configuration F-3
Cookie basics
Web browsers have built-in rules for receiving and sending cookies. When a browser
makes a request to a web server and the web server returns cookies with the response, the
browser will only accept a cookie if the domain associated with the cookie matches that of
the original request. Similarly, when a browser makes a subsequent request, it will only
send those cookies whose domain matches that of the target web server.
These rules are designed to ensure that information encoded in cookies is only “seen” by
the web server(s) that the originator of the cookie intended. These rules also ensure that
the cookie cannot be corrupted or imitated by another server. By default, the domain
associated with a cookie exactly matches that of the server that created it. However, it is
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 F-1
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
possible to modify the domain at the time the cookie is created. Relaxing the cookie
domain increases the scope of the cookie’s visibility making it available to a wider
“audience” of web servers.
For example, if a cookie is created by alcatel-lucent1.us.company.com, its domain will
usually be set to alcatel-lucent1.us.company.com. This means that the browser will only
send the cookie to alcatel-lucent1.us.company.com. It will never send it to any other
servers. However, if at the time of creation (when the server sends the cookie to the
browser), the domain of the cookie is set to .us.company.com, the browser will send the
cookie to any server whose domain falls within .us.company.com. such as alcatel-
lucent2.us.company.com or alcatel-lucent3.us.company.com.
Note: Make sure your domain name contains valid characters. An example of an
invalid character is “_”. Refer to the following Microsoft technote found at
http://support.microsoft.com/kb/275033
“Cookies Are Not Saved If the Host Name Is Invalid.”
Cookie administration for ACS

In an OmniTouch ACS stack, each server is administered separately. In a deployment, a
customer may want to use the same admin ID and password for managing all servers in a
stack, or even across sites. The administration interface provides a basic UI navigation
feature for moving from one server in the stack to another. To allow the administration
session credentials to be shared across the servers, the cookie domain needs to be set to
something like “.us.company.com” which is the sub-part of the overall server name that
matches all servers in the stack.
If the deployment does not allow this “seamless” administration navigation throughout the
stack, you can set the cookie domain to the appropriate FQDN (fully qualified domain
name) for each individual server. You can also set it to blank (no value) which has the
same effect as setting it to the FQDN for each particular server. This means that the
administrator will be prompted to login each time they move to a new server in the stack.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
F-2 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cookie mis-configuration
For all the reasons described above, if a server is mis-configured, which in this case,
specifically means that the cookie domain does not match the FQDN or sub-part of the
FQDN, the system administrator will not be able to manage the server through the web
interface. To recover from this situation, the cookie domain can be reset through the serial
administration interface.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 F-3
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
F-4 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

G IM Archiving
Overview
Purpose
This appendix discusses the availability of IM archiving over SMTP. It presents the SMTP
structure and field definitions.
Contents
The appendix covers the following topics.
IM archiving features and operating parameters G-1
The SMTP message structure G-2
Field definitions G-4
IM archiving features and operating parameters

IM archiving over SMTP is available in the Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch Advanced
Communication Server. Any content that is delivered within an SMTP mail message may
be sent to a service provider who provides offsite archiving and indexing. On a periodic
basis, OmniTouch ACS will send a batch of IM transcripts for all IM sessions that have
had new messages since the previous batch was sent.
Note: OmniTouch ACS (My Teamwork) IM sessions do not end and may be
revitalized after all participants have left. Therefore, there is no need to wait until the
end of an IM session before sending the transcript to the SMTP service. This will result
in multiple transmissions for a specific IM session which is identified by a “Call ID”
(unique identifier).
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 G-1
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OmniTouch ACS deployments may have multiple IM application servers with their own
unique Node IDs, each maintaining IM logs for users associated with that application
server. A user cannot own an IM session.
Note: Calls for each IM session are identified using a session ID and stored in
/var/log/sessionlogs.
All IM message exchanges are stored in /var/log/thslog.
The following are the basic features and operating parameters of SMTP IM archiving:
• Archives messages in batches. Batch processing runs approximately every 15 minutes
(default).
• Archives only new IM content since the last batch process was run.
• Sends a separate SMTP message for each IM session that has new IM content since the
previous send cycle.
• Stamps each SMTP message in the message Subject with a unique, monotonic
sequence number.
• Retains each SMTP message in the ACS server for 30 days (default). The default may
be overridden.
• Deletes expired SMTP messages automatically from the OmniTouch ACS server.
• Provides a URL interface to retrieve previously sent archive messages using the
sequence number as key to fetching a particular SMTP message.
The SMTP message structure

Each SMTP message contains one or more IM messages that have been sent as part of a
single IM session. The basic structure of the SMTP message is a standard header, followed
by a multipart message body composed of individual IM messages in plain text. The
following is an example as received by a test archiving service. Notable headers are
highlighted.
Return-Path: <acs_archive@al1.alcatel-lucent.office>
Received: from inbound-mx3.atl.registeredsite.com ([64.224.219.91])
by imta04a2.registeredsite.com with ESMTP
id <20040117155207.TCYP15957.imta04a2.registeredsite.com@inbound-
mx3.atl.registeredsite.com>
for <archives@alcatel.com>; Tue, 17 Jan 2006 10:52:07 -0500
Received: from serv7.alcatel-lucent.office (ctchost115.alcatel.com [66.152.249.115]
(may be forged))
by inbound-mx3.atl.registeredsite.com (8.12.11/8.12.11) with ESMTP id
k0HFoRqg025442
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
G-2 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Received: from al1.alcatel-lucent.office (al1.alcatel-lucent.office

[192.168.15.138])
by serv7.alcatel-lucent.office (8.11.4/8.11.4) with ESMTP id k0HFoFF21668
Received: from al1.alcatel-lucent.office (localhost [127.0.0.1])
by al1.alcatel-lucent.office (8.12.8/8.12.8) with ESMTP id k0HFo6Su015010
Received: (from acs_archive@localhost)
by al1.alcatel-lucent.office (8.12.8/8.12.8/Submit) id k0HFo6B9015007;
Tue, 17 Jan 2006 10:50:06 -0500
Date: Tue, 17 Jan 2006 10:50:06 -0500
Message-Id: <200401171550.k0HFo6B9015007@al1.alcatel-lucent.office>
MIME-Version: 1.0
Subject: Conversation AL:0100000000000002
X-Alcatel-IMA-ConversationID: 28C0UQ1B-O0FI-8M2E-7R78-6E18LV07GNXT
X-ZANTAZ-SEQUENCE: AL:0100000000000002
Content_length: 1058
X-Alcatel-IMA-Participants: jan.smith@alcatel-lucent.com tom.mcb@alcatel-lucent.com
Content-Type: multipart/mixed; boundary=28C0UQ1B-O0FI-8M2E-7R78-6E18LV07GNXT
To: archives@alcatel.com
From: acs_archive@al1.alcatel-lucent.office
--28C0UQ1B-O0FI-8M2E-7R78-6E18LV07GNXT
Content-Type: message/rfc822
Content-Transfer-Encoding: 7bit
Date: Tue, 17 Jan 2006 15:45:47 UT

From: tom.mcb@alcatel-lucent.com
To: jan.smith@alcatel-lucent.com
Content-Type: text/plain
Content-Length: 5
hello
Date: Tue, 17 Jan 2006 15:45:51 UT

From: jan.smith@alcatel-lucent.com
To: tom.mcb@alcatel-lucent.com
Content-Length: 16
and hello to you
Date: Tue, 17 Jan 2006 15:45:55 UT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 G-3
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
From: tom.mcb@alcatel-lucent.com
To: jan.smith@alcatel-lucent.com
Content-Length: 18
and a reply to you
Date: Tue, 17 Jan 2006 15:46:00 UT

From: jan.smith@alcatel-lucent.com
To: tom.mcb@alcatel-lucent.com
Content-Length: 24
and another reply to you
--28C0UQ1B-O0FI-8M2E-7R78-6E18LV07GNXT--
Field definitions
X–Alcatel–IMA–ConversationID: This header contains the actual SIP Call ID
associated with this message session. This string uniquely identifies the conversation across
all OmniTouch ACS servers within a stack or multi-site configuration.
X–Alcatel–IMA–Participants: This field contains a white-space delimited list of all users
who have participated at some point in the conversation. It is important to note that the
individual IM message bodies must be examined to know exactly which users were in the
session when a particular message was sent.
X–ZANTAZ–SEQUENCE: This field contains the sequence number for this SMTP
message. The format of the message is AL:NN############## where:
“AL:” – Quick visual indication that this is from an Alcatel-Lucent session.
NN – The Alcatel-Lucent system Node ID where this archive was collected.
####... – The serial number for this SMTP message. The number will begin at 0, and
will grow forever. A serial number will never be used twice on a particular OmniTouch
ACS node.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
G-4 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

H SNMP Traps
Overview
Purpose
This appendix gives information about SNMP traps that are supported by ACS.
Contents
The appendix covers the following topics.
SNMP traps H-1
SNMP v2 H-1
SNMP v3 H-2
MIB H-3
SNMP traps
SNMP version 2 and version 3 traps are supported by the OmniTouch ACS. Traps are
enabled and configured in Configuration->Advance Settings -> Configure SNMP
Traps. In all cases, the traps are sent to the host specified as the “SNMP Monitoring
Host.”
SNMP v2
The OmniTouch ACS enterprise number is 19631. The SNMP traps include the following
objects:
sysUpTime.0 *** (TimeTicks) 0 days 06h:16m:16s.49th
snmpTrapOID.0 *** (OBJECT IDENTIFIER) internet.4.1.19631.1.1.2
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 H-1
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
edial.1.1.1.2 *** (octet string) timestamp

edial.1.1.1.3 *** (octet string) fault message identifier
edial.1.1.1.4 *** (octet string) servername
edial.1.1.1.9 *** (octet string) trap message
SNMP v3
SNMP V3 traps are very similar to v2 traps, but with enhanced authentication and
encryption capabilities. Instead of a community string, there are 3 authentication
parameters:
SNMP_ENGINE_NUMBER authoritative (security) engineID for SNMPv3 requests.
The engine number is specified in hex, for example: 0x0102030405. It is chosen by the
administrator, and must agree on both the trap sending and trap receiving sides.
SNMP_USER SNMP v3 security name (uses MD5 authentication).
The SNMP security name is a text string without spaces. It too is chosen by the
administrator, and must agree on both the trap sending and trap receiving sides
SNMP_PASSWORD SNMP v3 security pass phrase and privacy pass phrase.
The SNMP password is a text string without spaces. Both the trap sending and trap
receiving sides must be configured to use the same password for the specified user.
Appropriate provisioning must be done on the receiving side to enable receipt of these
traps.
Here is sample output from the receipt of a trap by NuDesign Visual MIBBrowser Pro:
Trap (V2), 03-04-2004 21:40:56, 192.168.21.51, notification
Community String = public
Request = 382741864
1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3.0 = 0-3:13:56.54
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.4.1.0 = 1.3.6.1.4.1.19631.1.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.19631.1.1.1.2 = 2004/03/04 18:40:56.03
1.3.6.1.4.1.19631.1.1.1.3 = TNS-3001
1.3.6.1.4.1.19631.1.1.1.4 = enterprise1
1.3.6.1.4.1.19631.1.1.1.9 = Outgoing call server restart at Thu Mar 4
18:40:56 PST 2004
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
H-2 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MIB
EDIAL-MIB DEFINITIONS ::= BEGIN
IMPORTS
MODULE-IDENTITY, NOTIFICATION-TYPE, OBJECT-TYPE,
enterprises, Counter32, Integer32, Unsigned32
FROM SNMPv2-SMI
DateAndTime, DisplayString, TEXTUAL-CONVENTION
FROM SNMPv2-TC
InetAddressType, InetAddress
FROM INET-ADDRESS-MIB;
edial MODULE-IDENTITY
LAST-UPDATED "200802182303Z"
ORGANIZATION "eDial, Inc (a division of Alcatel-Lucent)"
CONTACT-INFO
"Postal: Alcatel-Lucent
One Cranberry Hill
Lexington, MA 02421
781-879-1689
WWW: http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/"
DESCRIPTION
"This document contains the management information that is
common to all elements in an eDial Server."
REVISION"200402252000Z"
DESCRIPTION
"Released with ACS 5.6.0;
Supports only NOTIFICATIONs."
REVISION"200510032144Z"
DESCRIPTION
"Released with ACS 6.0;
Adds Monitoring (read only)."
REVISION"200708022105Z"
DESCRIPTION
Updates corporate name, postal address."
REVISION"200802182303Z"
DESCRIPTION
Add mediaServerState, mediaAudioCurrent, mediaAudioAllowed,
mediaAppSharingCurrent, mediaAppSharingAllowed,
mediaVideoCurrent objects."
::= { enterprises 19631 }
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
-- ****************
-- Textual Conventions
-- establish length limits for strings used as indices
DomString ::= TEXTUAL-CONVENTION

STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Denotes an eDial Server Virtual Server Domain name."
SYNTAXOCTET STRING (SIZE (1..64))
OrgString ::= TEXTUAL-CONVENTION

STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Denotes an eDial Server Organization name."
UserString ::= TEXTUAL-CONVENTION

STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Denotes an eDial Server User name."
CallIdString ::= TEXTUAL-CONVENTION

STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Denotes an eDial Server Call Id."
ServerStatus ::= TEXTUAL-CONVENTION

STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"A Value that represents the status of an eDial Server process
or server watchdog process.
normal(0)process or watchdog process running normally.

notRunning(1)process or watchdog process not running.
disabled(100)process or watchdog process disabled."
SYNTAXINTEGER {
normal(0),
notRunning(1),
disabled(100)
}
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
-- ****************
-- Common Group
common OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { edial 1 }
systemFaults OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { common 1 }

products OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { common 2 }
monitoring OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { common 3 }
-- ****************
-- System Faults Group
faultFields OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { systemFaults 1 }
timeStamp OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDateAndTime
MAX-ACCESSaccessible-for-notify
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"The date and time at which the fault was generated."
::= { faultFields 2 }
msgString OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDisplayString
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"The fault message string."
systemName OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDisplayString
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"The hostname of the system generating the fault."
problemText OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDisplayString
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Text describing the nature of the problem.
The text consists of constant and variable portions."
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
notification NOTIFICATION-TYPE
OBJECTS{ timeStamp, msgString, systemName, problemText }
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"A notification indicates detection of an abnormal
condition in the system."
::= { systemFaults 2 }
-- ****************
-- Products Group
acs OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { products 1 }
-- ****************
-- Monitoring Group
call OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { monitoring 1 }

media OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { monitoring 2 }
user OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { monitoring 3 }
disk OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { monitoring 4 }
trunk OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { monitoring 5 }
site OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { monitoring 6 }
replication OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { monitoring 7 }
server OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { monitoring 8 }
-- ****************
-- call Group
-- Active Call table
activeCallTable OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXSEQUENCE OF ActiveCallEntry
MAX-ACCESSnot-accessible
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Table of Active Calls controlled by this system."
::= { call 1 }
activeCallEntry OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXActiveCallEntry
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Active Call Table Entry."
INDEX{ activeCallCallId }
::= { activeCallTable 1 }
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ActiveCallEntry ::= SEQUENCE {

activeCallCallId
CallIdString,
activeCallOwner
DisplayString,
activeCallCreator
DisplayString,
activeCallVanity
DisplayString,
activeCallLeader
DisplayString,
activeCallSubject
DisplayString,
activeCallStartTime
DateAndTime,
activeCallEndTime
DateAndTime,
activeCallRecurrence
DisplayString,
activeCallProject
DisplayString,
activeCallDepartment
DisplayString
}
activeCallCallId OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXCallIdString
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Call Id for this Active Call."
::= { activeCallEntry 1 }
activeCallOwner OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDisplayString
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Owner name for this Active Call."
activeCallCreator OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDisplayString
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Creator name for this Active Call."
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
activeCallVanity OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDisplayString
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Vanity information for this Active Call."
activeCallLeader OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDisplayString
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Leader information for this Active Call."
activeCallSubject OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDisplayString
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Subject Information for this Active Call."
activeCallStartTime OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDateAndTime
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Start time for this Active Call.
If not known, then this variable will have the value

corresponding to January 1, year 0000, 00:00:00.0, which is
encoded as (hex)'00 00 01 01 00 00 00 00'."
activeCallEndTime OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDateAndTime
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"End Time for this Active Call.

encoded as (hex)'00 00 01 01 00 00 00 00'."
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
activeCallRecurrence OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDisplayString
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Recurrence information for this Active Call."
activeCallProject OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDisplayString
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Project information for this Active Call."
activeCallDepartment OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDisplayString
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Department information for this Active Call."
-- Active Call Leg table
activeCallLegTable OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXSEQUENCE OF ActiveCallLegEntry
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Table of Active Call Legs."
::= { call 2 }
activeCallLegEntry OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXActiveCallLegEntry
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Active Call Leg Table Entry."
INDEX{ activeCallLegCallId, activeCallLegLegId }
::= { activeCallLegTable 1 }
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ActiveCallLegEntry ::= SEQUENCE {

activeCallLegCallId
CallIdString,
activeCallLegLegId
Unsigned32,
activeCallLegInfo
DisplayString,
activeCallLegUpFor
Unsigned32
}
activeCallLegCallId OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXCallIdString
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Call Id for this Active Call Leg."
::= { activeCallLegEntry 1 }
activeCallLegLegId OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXUnsigned32
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Leg Id for this Active Call Leg."
activeCallLegInfo OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDisplayString
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Information for this Active Call Leg."
activeCallLegUpFor OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXUnsigned32
UNITS"Seconds"
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Uptime in seconds for this Active Call Leg."
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
-- ****************
-- media Group
-- Active Media Call table
activeMediaTable OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXSEQUENCE OF ActiveMediaEntry
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Table of all Active Calls with legs that
terminate on this physical system."
::= { media 1 }
activeMediaEntry OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXActiveMediaEntry
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Active Media Call Table Entry."
INDEX{ activeMediaCallId }
::= { activeMediaTable 1 }
ActiveMediaEntry ::= SEQUENCE {

activeMediaCallId
CallIdString,
activeMediaOwner
DisplayString,
activeMediaCreator
DisplayString,
activeMediaVanity
DisplayString,
activeMediaLeader
DisplayString,
activeMediaSubject
DisplayString,
activeMediaStartTime
DateAndTime,
activeMediaEndTime
DateAndTime,
activeMediaRecurrence
DisplayString,
activeMediaProject
DisplayString,
activeMediaDepartment
DisplayString
}
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
activeMediaCallId OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXCallIdString
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Call Id for this Active Media Call."
::= { activeMediaEntry 1 }
activeMediaOwner OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDisplayString
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Owner name for this Active Media Call."
activeMediaCreator OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDisplayString
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Creator name for this Active Media Call."
activeMediaVanity OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDisplayString
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Vanity information for this Active Media Call."
activeMediaLeader OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDisplayString
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Leader information for this Active Media Call."
activeMediaSubject OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDisplayString
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Subject Information for this Active Media Call."
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
activeMediaStartTime OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDateAndTime
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Start time for this Active Media Call.

encoded as (hex)'00 00 01 01 00 00 00 00'."
activeMediaEndTime OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDateAndTime
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"End Time for this Active Media Call.

encoded as (hex)'00 00 01 01 00 00 00 00'."
activeMediaRecurrence OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDisplayString
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Recurrence information for this Active Media Call."
activeMediaProject OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDisplayString
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Project information for this Active Media Call."
activeMediaDepartment OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDisplayString
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Department information for this Active Media Call."
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
-- Active Media Call Leg table
activeMediaLegTable OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXSEQUENCE OF ActiveMediaLegEntry
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Table of Active Media Call Legs."
::= { media 2 }
activeMediaLegEntry OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXActiveMediaLegEntry
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Active Media Call Leg Table Entry."
INDEX{ activeMediaLegCallId, activeMediaLegLegId }
::= { activeMediaLegTable 1 }
ActiveMediaLegEntry ::= SEQUENCE {

activeMediaLegCallId
CallIdString,
activeMediaLegLegId
Unsigned32,
activeMediaLegInfo
DisplayString,
activeMediaLegUpFor
Unsigned32
}
activeMediaLegCallId OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXCallIdString
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Call Id for this Active Media Call Leg."
::= { activeMediaLegEntry 1 }
activeMediaLegLegId OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXUnsigned32
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Leg Id for this Active Media Call Leg."
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
activeMediaLegInfo OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDisplayString
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Information for this Active Media Call Leg."
activeMediaLegUpFor OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXUnsigned32
UNITS"Seconds"
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Uptime in seconds for this Active Media Call Leg."
mediaServerState OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXINTEGER {
active(0),
quiescent(1)
}
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"active(1) servers accept new media legs."
::= { media 3 }
mediaAudioCurrent OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXUnsigned32
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Number of current Audio legs on this server."
::= { media 4 }
mediaAudioAllowed OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXUnsigned32
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Total allowed Audio legs on this server."
::= { media 5 }
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
mediaAppSharingCurrent OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXUnsigned32
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Number of current AppSharing legs on this server."
::= { media 6 }
mediaAppSharingAllowed OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXUnsigned32
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Total allowed AppSharing legs on this server."
::= { media 7 }
mediaVideoCurrent OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXUnsigned32
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Number of current AppSharing legs on this server."
::= { media 8 }
-- ****************
-- User Group
-- Active User table
activeUserTable OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXSEQUENCE OF ActiveUserEntry
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Table of users who are currently logged into the
Instant Collaboration System on this server."
::= { user 1 }
activeUserEntry OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXActiveUserEntry
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Active User Entry."
INDEX{ activeUserIndex }
::= { activeUserTable 1 }
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ActiveUserEntry ::= SEQUENCE {

activeUserIndex
Integer32,
activeUserUsername
UserString,
activeUserDomain
DomString,
activeUserOrganization
OrgString,
activeUserStatus
INTEGER,
activeUserTime
Unsigned32,
activeUserAddressType
InetAddressType,
activeUserAddress
InetAddress,
activeUserPort
INTEGER
}
activeUserIndex OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXInteger32 (1..32767)
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Index for this Active User Entry."
::= { activeUserEntry 1 }
activeUserUsername OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXUserString
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"User name for this Active User."
activeUserDomain OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDomString
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Domain name for this Active User."
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
activeUserOrganization OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXOrgString
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Organization name for this Active User."
activeUserStatus OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXINTEGER {
idle(0),
onPhone(1)
}
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Status of this user."
activeUserTime OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXUnsigned32
UNITS"Seconds"
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Time in seconds this user has been active."
activeUserAddressType OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXInetAddressType
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Remote Internet Address type for this Active User."
activeUserAddress OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXInetAddress
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Remote Internet Address for this Active User."
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
activeUserPort OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXINTEGER (0..65535)
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Remote TCP Port for this Active User."
-- ****************
-- Trunk Group
trunkCount OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXUnsigned32
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Number of PSTN Trunks on this server."
::= { trunk 1 }
-- PSTN Trunk Status table
trunkTable OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXSEQUENCE OF TrunkEntry
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Table with Status information of PSTN Trunks."
::= { trunk 2 }
trunkEntry OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXTrunkEntry
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"per Trunk information."
INDEX{ trunkIndex }
::= { trunkTable 1 }
TrunkEntry ::= SEQUENCE {

trunkIndex
Integer32,
trunkStatus
INTEGER,
trunkChannelsFree
Integer32,
trunkChannelsActive
Integer32,
trunkChannelsOutOfService
Integer32
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
trunkIndex OBJECT-TYPE
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Index for this PSTN Trunk."
::= { trunkEntry 1 }
trunkStatus OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXINTEGER {
inService(1),
quiescent(2),
down(3)
}
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Status of this trunk."
trunkChannelsFree OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXInteger32
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Channels free on this PSTN Trunk."
trunkChannelsActive OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXInteger32
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Channels active on this PSTN Trunk."
trunkChannelsOutOfService OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXInteger32
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Channels out of service on this PSTN Trunk."
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
-- ****************
-- Site Group
-- Stacked Server table
stackServerTable OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXSEQUENCE OF StackServerEntry
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Table with Information on Servers which are
members of the local Server Stack."
::= { site 1 }
stackServerEntry OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXStackServerEntry
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Stacked Server Table Entry."
INDEX{ stackServerIndex }
::= { stackServerTable 1 }
StackServerEntry ::= SEQUENCE {

stackServerIndex
Integer32,
stackServerHostname
DisplayString,
stackServerStackName
DisplayString,
stackServerStatus
DisplayString,
stackServerUsers
Integer32
}
stackServerIndex OBJECT-TYPE
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Stacked Server Index."
::= { stackServerEntry 1 }
stackServerHostname OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDisplayString
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
"Fully qualified domain name for a Stacked Server."

stackServerStackName OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDisplayString
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Stack name for this Stacked Server."
stackServerStatus OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDisplayString
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Status of this Stacked Server."
stackServerUsers OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXInteger32
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"User Count for this Stacked Server."
-- Site Connection table
remoteSiteTable OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXSEQUENCE OF RemoteSiteEntry
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Table with Information on Remote Connected Sites
with which users can establish distributed conferences."
::= { site 2 }
remoteSiteEntry OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXRemoteSiteEntry
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Site Connection Table Entry."
INDEX{ remoteSiteIndex }
::= { remoteSiteTable 1 }
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RemoteSiteEntry ::= SEQUENCE {

remoteSiteIndex
Integer32,
remoteSiteHostname
DisplayString,
remoteSiteStackName
DisplayString,
remoteSiteStatus
DisplayString,
remoteSiteUsers
Integer32
}
remoteSiteIndex OBJECT-TYPE
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Site Connection Index."
::= { remoteSiteEntry 1 }
remoteSiteHostname OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDisplayString
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Fully qualified domain name for a Site Connection."
remoteSiteStackName OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDisplayString
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Stack name for this Site Connection."
remoteSiteStatus OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDisplayString
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Status of this Site Connection."
remoteSiteUsers OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXInteger32
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DESCRIPTION
"User Count for this Site Connection."
-- ****************
-- Data Replication Group
replEnabled OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXINTEGER {
disabled(0),
enabled(1)
}
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Server Data Replication Enabled."
::= { replication 1 }
replStartTime OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDateAndTime
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Data Replication Start Time.

encoded as (hex)'00 00 01 01 00 00 00 00'."
replBackupServer OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDisplayString
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Data Replication Backup Server."
replBackupServerAddressType OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXInetAddressType
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Data Replication Backup Server Address Type."
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
replBackupServerAddress OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXInetAddress
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Data Replication Backup Server Address."
replPeerStatus OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDisplayString
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Data Replication Peer Status."
replPeerStatusChange OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDateAndTime
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Date and time of last Replication Peer Status change.

encoded as (hex)'00 00 01 01 00 00 00 00'."
replTxNewUpdates OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXUnsigned32
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Number of database changes on this server that need to be
replicated."
replTxQueuedUpdates OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXUnsigned32
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Number of currently queued outgoing data replication updates."
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
replTxPendingUpdates OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXUnsigned32
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Number of currently data replication updates sent,
but not yet confirmed."
replTxCompletedUpdates OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXUnsigned32
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Count of completed outgoing data replication updates."
replTxUpdateErrors OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXUnsigned32
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Count of outgoing data replication update errors."
replRxNewUpdates OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXUnsigned32
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Number of current new incomming data replication updates."
replRxPendingUpdates OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXUnsigned32
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Number of incomming data replication updates currently
being processed by the database."
replRxCompletedUpdates OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXUnsigned32
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Count of succesfully completed incomming data replication
updates processed."
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
replRxUpdateErrors OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXUnsigned32
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Count of data replication update errors."
-- ****************
-- Server Group
serverVersion OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDisplayString
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Server Software Version."
::= { server 1 }
-- Server Process Status table
serverProcessTable OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXSEQUENCE OF ServerProcessEntry
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Table with information on status of server processes
within the ACS Server."
::= { server 2 }
serverProcessEntry OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXServerProcessEntry
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Status information for a Server Process."
INDEX{ serverProcessName }
::= { serverProcessTable 1 }
ServerProcessEntry ::= SEQUENCE {

serverProcessName
DisplayString,
serverProcessStatus
ServerStatus,
serverProcessWatchdogStatus
ServerStatus
}
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
serverProcessName OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXDisplayString (SIZE (1..32))
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"The name of this server process."
::= { serverProcessEntry 1 }
serverProcessStatus OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXServerStatus
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"The status of this server process."
serverProcessWatchdogStatus OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAXServerStatus
MAX-ACCESSread-only
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"The status of the watchdog for this server process."
END
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

I Application Sharing
Proxy Issues
Overview
Purpose
This appendix presents solutions to difficulties with proxy traversal.
Contents
This appendix covers the following topics and procedures.
Topics:
Proxy traversal solutions I-2
Authentication I-2
Logging I-2
Uninstall I-3
Procedures:
To generate a log I-3
To automatically uninstall I-3
To manually uninstall I-6
To enable application sharing logging I-7
To generate the log I-7
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 I-1
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Proxy traversal solutions
Authentication
The Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch Advanced Communication Server supports proxy
traversal using no authentication (None) and various forms of authentication.
• Digest
• Basic
• NTLM
Note: Pre-release ACS 6.01 requires traversing a transparent Authentication proxy

or the Application Sharing components will not work.
Some issues have arisen during the attempt to contact clients that are situated behind
Proxy servers that require Authentication. Because various Proxy standards have been
implemented, the issues differ. Alcatel-Lucent has developed helpful tools to deal with
these issues.
Logging
You can generate a log file on the client machine that reports connection processes and
proxy traversal details for diagnostic purposes. After the file is generated, it can be e-
mailed to Alcatel-Lucent Support for further analysis and diagnosis of the problem.
Logging is available through DEBUG and RELEASE builds of Application Sharing for
both Leader and Viewer. The resulting log file is stored in the same directory where
Application Sharing Components are downloaded and installed by Internet Explorer. The
log file is not stored in the root of the system drive which gets flagged by some Anti-Virus
software.
Note: Because there have been reported issues with the automatic upgrade feature
related to Internet Explorer’s Download capability, Alcatel-Lucent recommends
uninstalling all previously installed Application Sharing components, enabling the
Application Sharing setting, rebooting, and performing a new installation of the
updated components.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
I-2 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To generate a log
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Uninstall your current Application Sharing components using the Automatic or Manual
Uninstall.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Enable the Application Sharing Logging setting.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Generate the Log and e-mail it to Alcatel-Lucent Support.

END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
Uninstall
OmniTouch ACS Application Sharing components are automatically installed through
Internet Explorer’s download for ActiveX controls.
Internet Explorer provides a user interface for uninstalling components. However, the files
contained in the CAB files are not removed. This can lead to a propagation of outdated
versions of ActiveX files.To avoid this, there is a manual batch script within the Cabinet
package. This automatic uninstall removes all versions of a specific component from the
entire Component Download cache managed by Internet Explorer.
Note: If the Automatic Uninstall script fails for any reason, then a Manual Uninstall
is required.
To automatically uninstall
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Close all Internet Explorer applications.

Alcatel-Lucent recommends using Task Manager to verify that all processes running
IExplorer.exe are also terminated.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Open a Command Shell

<W i nd o ws -k e y> R” c md . ex e” < EN TE R >
Note: You cannot use Windows Explorer to do this because it treats the
“Downloaded Program Files” cache as a special directory.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Go to the directory containing the Internet Explorer downloaded program files cache.
Quotes must be used.
Example:
CD”%SystemRoot%\Downloaded Program Files”)
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Search for EDCUninstall.bat and EDCViewerUninstall.bat scripts in this directory and all
subdirectories of the cache.
Example:
dir/O-D/TA/s EDCUninstall.bat EDCViewerUninstall.bat)
Note: Internet Explorer creates Conflict directories during the Component

Download process to attempt to avoid component conflicts. The Application Sharing
components may exist in multiple locations (multiple Conflict directories) in the
cache.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Select which installer to run, and the location where to run it. If multiple installations are
present, Alcatel-Lucent recommends running the most recent version of the installer. The
most recent version recognizes the set of all files used in previous versions of ACS’s
Application Sharing. Choose the most recent Conflict directory indicated by the highest
numbered file extension (for example, CONFLICT.<number>). You can locate the
Conflict directory by listing the modification dates or the highest sequence number.
If you use the directory listing command in Step 4, you will see the most recently
accessed Conflict directories listed at the top of the list.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If no Conflict directories exist, uninstall from the root directory of the cache:
Example:
%s y st e mr oo t %\ do w nl o ad ed pr og r am fi le s \
Note: If the file cannot be located, your installation is damaged and a manual
uninstall is required.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Navigate to the appropriate Conflict directory and run your uninstaller scripts from the
appropriate locations.
Example:
C D c on fl i ct .9
ED CU n in st a ll . ba t
CD .. . \c on f li c t. 3
ED CV i ew er U ni n st al l .b at
Note: You must uninstall both the Leader and the Viewer components because they
share common files. Because Internet Explorer places multiple components into the
same Conflict directory, uninstalling one component will damage the other.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 After uninstalling both components, force new versions of the Leader and Viewer
components to install.
If you see something like the following, you have successfully uninstalled the components.
C :\ W IN DO W S\ Do w nl o ad ed Pr og r am Fi le s >E DC U ni n st al l .b at
A ll fi le s u ni n st a ll ed .
D on e
T he ba tc h f il e c a nn ot be f o un d .
T he ba tc h f il e c a nn ot be f o un d .
Note: You can ignore “The batch file cannot be found” errors.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 If you see something like the following, the uninstall was not successful, and you may need
to manually uninstall all files related to the components.
C :\ W IN DO W S\ Do w nl o ad ed Pr og r am Fi le s >E DC U ni n st al l .b at
C :\ W IN DO W S\ Do w nl o ad ed Pr og r am Fi le s \e Di a lC o ll ab 2 00 .e x e
A cc e ss i s d en i ed .
C :\ W IN DO W S\ Do w nl o ad ed Pr og r am Fi le s \e Di a lC o ll ab 2 00 .d l l
T he p r oc es s c an n ot a cc e ss t h e fi le b e ca us e i t is b e in g us e d by
an ot h er p r oc e ss .
C :\ W IN DO W S\ Do w nl o ad ed Pr og r am Fi le s \e dc h oo k s2 00 . dl l
C :\ W IN DO W S\ Do w nl o ad ed Pr og r am Fi le s \E DC H ig h li te H oo k2 0 0. d ll
C :\ W IN DO W S\ Do w nl o ad ed Pr og r am Fi le s \e Di a lC o ll ab . lo g
T he p r oc es s c an n ot a cc e ss t h e fi le b e ca us e i t is b e in g us e d by
an ot h er p r oc e ss .
N ot al l f il e s un i ns ta l le d . [5 fi le s r e ma in . ] P le as e t ry ag a in
la te r .
D on e .
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: In the above example, errors occurred because Internet Explorer is still using
the components. Also, the uninstaller file may be deleted after these errors are
generated, requiring a manual uninstall to remedy the problem.
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
To manually uninstall
• You will need to delete all Application Sharing component files in every place they
appear in the cache (including all Conflict.<number> directories). You may need to
reboot, if some of the DLLs are in use.
Application Sharing Leader Components

You will need to delete the following files:
Note: A Windows HOOK (EDCHighliteHook.dll) is used by the leader code. As a

result, the Leader component occasionally does not get released immediately. It may
take several minutes. You may need to reboot if the file is not released after closing all
Internet Explorer Windows.
Example:
de l / s /f e d ia lc o ll a b* .* ed ch o ok s *. dl l E DC H ig h li te H oo k* . dl l
E D C_ *. i nf E D CC h ec k4 p ro xy * .e x e eD i al Co l la b .l og *
E D CU ni n st al l .b a t
O R f or th e V ie w er c o mp on e nt :
de l / s/ f E DC Vi e we r *. dl l E DC V ie w er _* . in f E DC C he ck 4 pr ox y *. ex e
v n cv ie w er .l o g* ED CV i ew er U ni n st al l .b at
You will also need to delete any C runtime files that were installed in every Conflict
directory in which an Alcatel-Lucent Application Sharing component appears.
Note: You must only delete these files in directories of the cache where other
Application Sharing files existed to avoid damaging other Internet Explorer
components not associated with the Alcatel-Lucent Application Sharing product.
de l m s vc r7 1 d. dl l m s vc p7 1 d. dl l m s vc r7 1 .d ll ms v cp 71 . dl l
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To enable application sharing logging

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Open the System Control Panel.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Navigate to the Advanced Tab and click the Environment Variables button.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In System Variables, click the New button.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Enter the following:
Variable Name: VNCDEBUG

Variable Value: 1
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click the OK button (3 times).

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Reboot the system.

END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
To generate the log

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Log in to a My Teamwork server, and initiate an Application Sharing session.
Note: After a complete uninstall, you should be forced to download and install the
Application Sharing Leader (eDialCollab*.cab) and the Application Sharing Viewer
(EDCViewer*.cab) components.
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Connect to the OmniTouch ACS (My Teamwork) Desktop MCU process for Application
Sharing sessions.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 To retrieve and submit the Application Sharing log file, change directories to the
Windows Downloaded Program Files cache.
Example:
CD "% S ys te m Ro ot % \D o wn lo a de d P ro g ra m F il es "
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Determine where the component was installed in the cache.

Example:
di r / s e Di a lC ol l ab * .d ll di r / s E DC Vi e we r* . dl l .
Note: There should only be one of each of the components – eDialCollab*.dll;

EDCViewer*.dll – because previous versions were uninstalled.
A.log file should appear in the same component directory.
Example:
eD i al C ol la b .l og or vn cv i ew er . lo g
END OF STEPS
........................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

Index
.............................................................................
Active Directory sending, 5-9
.md5 file, 3-10, 3-16, 3-23 global catalog, 2-46 server, B-1
µ-law, 2-10 ActiveX, 4-9, 4-35 Alliance server, 3-5
.............................................................................
Ad hoc allow, 4-58
call, 2-29, 4-44, 4-45, 4-46,
7-digit dialing, 2-89 Alternate outbound proxy, 2-31
5-21
Alternate server IP, 2-32
............................................................................. conferences, 4-7
AMDS
reservationless, 4-8
A Access code audio ports, 2-67
leader, 4-14 Adding user, 4-56
ports, 4-16
auto add contact, 4-60
Access codes, 2-62, 4-41, 4-44,
ports license, 2-67
4-67 Administrator
domains, 2-63 list, 4-74 users, 2-113, 4-33
formats, 2-62 password, 4-75 Anonymous participant, 2-24
node ID, 2-76 Administrator password, 4-75 API, 2-114
participant, 4-56 Advanced Application sharing, 4-58

settings, 2-87 automatic uninstall, I-3
range, 2-63
Agent color depth, 2-24
reservationless, 4-56
URI, 2-116 expanding window, 4-37,
restricting, 4-8
Agent/service pair, 2-115 4-60
six digit, 2-77
Alarm server IM session, 4-31
usage, 5-9 hostname, 2-99 log, I-8
ACS port, 2-99 log file, I-2
disassembling stacks, 2-86
Alarms, 2-22 manual uninstall, I-6
domain, 2-39 common, B-1
port, 2-26
enterprise number, H-1 server, B-1
uninstalling components, I-2
stack, 2-75 A-law, 2-10
window position, 4-61
user names, 2-32 Alcatel OXE SIP gateway, 4-30
Application suites, 1-3
Action formats, 4-56 Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch
Attachments
Active Unified Communications, 2-48
allow, 4-58
calls, 5-3 Alert IDs, B-2
Instant Messaging (IM), 4-58
leg, 5-13 Alerts, 2-22
Audio, 4-62
media, 5-4 common, B-1
CODEC, 4-46
port, 6-6 conditions, A-1
leg, 2-26
talker, 2-24 information, B-3
payload, 4-46
users, 5-8
port, 2-26
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8AL90208USAD ed01 IN-1
November 20, 2008

Index
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................
port limits, 2-27 Buddies, 4-37
port usage notification, 2-26 B Backplane Bulk provisioning
disconnecting server, 3-8 file format, 4-55
ports per organization, 2-26
topology, 2-87 parameters, 4-56
prompt, 4-32
Backup users, 4-54
quality, 5-4, 5-6
automated nightly, 2-70
recording application, 2-36 Bulk provisioning messages, 4-63
chunk size, 2-70, 3-2
video call, 4-38 Busy presence, 4-59
manual, 3-2
Audiocodes board, 2-11 ...........................................................................
software revision, 3-8
Authentication CAB file, I-3
start time, automatic, 2-70 C
ACS access, 2-32
user data, 3-2 Calendar dialog boxes, 4-40
basic, 4-63
Banding Call
digest, 4-63 active, 5-3
OEM distribution, 1-2
intermediary, 2-32 barring rule, 4-58
BBMUX, 3-29
NTLM, 4-63 collect quality data, 5-4, 5-6
Billing
proxy traversal, I-2 code, 4-58, 6-9 direction, 4-44
SIP proxy, 4-39, 4-63 extension, 4-30, 4-58 ending, 5-4, 5-6
SIP registrar, 4-39, 4-63 Blocking incoming, 4-44
timeout, 2-49 calls, 4-51
outgoing, 4-44
UC server, 2-48 contact, 4-60 owner, 4-44
users, 2-44 Instant messages to busy user,
routing, 2-91
4-59
Authorization start time, 4-41, 4-42, 4-43
password, 2-30 result, 4-51
subject, 6-8
user name, 2-30 rule, 4-50, 4-51
Call barring rule, 4-32
user names, 2-32 Bonding, 2-101
ID, 4-58
Auto Boolean
organization, 4-32
accept new contacts, 4-60 type, 4-57
Call blocking
add contacts, 4-60 value, 4-57 mechanism, 4-50
answer, 4-39 Branding rules, 2-51
current, 2-40
provisioning, 2-44, 2-47 rules list, 4-53
default, 2-52
synchronize, 2-47 Call blocking rules
edit, 2-56
Auto extend testing, 4-53
allow, 4-58 file, 2-55
Call center, 4-45
Automated failover, 2-81 multiple brands, 2-52 Call Detail Report (CDR)
Automated Message Delivery Bridge conferences, 2-77 fields, 4-41, 4-42, 4-43
System (AMDS) Broadcast generating, 4-42
broadcast, 4-33 enabled, 4-57
screen, 6-2
settings, 2-113 list, 2-112
Call ID, 4-41, 4-45
Automatic uninstall, I-3 ports, 4-57
Caller ID, 4-44
Away timeout, 4-59 session duration, 2-114
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-2 8AL90208USAD ed01
November 20, 2008

Index
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Calling auto-extending, 4-32 contacts

by name, 4-60 bridged, 2-77 adding, 4-20
Capacity utilization, 6-5 distributed, 5-13 Control panel, I-7
CAS, 4-45 expired, 2-24, 4-31 Converged application suites, 1-3
CD ISO image file, 3-27 invite, 4-11 Conversation window, 4-37
CDR (report), 2-89 leaders, 2-24 Cookies, F-1
Certificate domain, 2-41, F-1
maximum length in
and key pair, E-3 Sametime, 4-14 technote, 2-8
authorities, 2-43, 2-44 owner, 6-8 Country codes, 2-22
Channels recurring, 4-31 CSess Object, 4-9
number, 4-45 CSV file, 4-67
repeating, 4-14
number of DS0s, 2-11 CSV report, 4-43
scheduled, 4-8, 4-40
outbound, 2-11 Current filter, 4-60
timeout, 2-24
Circuit type, 2-11 Custom
type, 2-17
Client connector, 4-32 replacement string, 2-89
URLs, 2-23
Clock source, 2-10, 2-11 Customer support, 3-28
Conferencing
Cluster IBM Lotus Sametime, 4-16, CvncViewer Object, 4-9
certificates, 2-43 4-32 .............................................................................
FQDN, 2-80 Microsoft Office Live
D DAS rules, 2-91, 2-92, 2-93
IP address, 2-80 Communicator, 4-16
Data
IP addresses, 2-41 Configuration
incoming, 5-17
names, 2-40 menu, 2-5
new, 5-17
Code restore, 3-22
outgoing, 5-17
access, 4-44 Conflict directories, I-4
pending, 5-17
billing, 6-9 Conflict directory, I-4
queued, 5-17
department, 4-31, 4-41, 4-42, Connectivity
4-43, 4-44, 4-57, 6-3, 6-9 test, 2-47, 5-19 replication, 2-63, 2-81, 2-85,
5-15
leader, 6-8 Connector settings, 2-114
transaction, 5-17
participant, 6-8 Console
application, E-2 Database
project, 4-31, 4-41, 4-43,
backup server, 2-82
4-45, 4-57, 6-3, 6-9 serial, E-1
internal, 2-44
CODECs, 2-12 window, 4-38
replication, 3-8, 3-13
Collaboration subnet, 2-99 Contact requests
auto accept, 4-60 Date, 2-29
Color depth, 2-24
Contacts Daylight savings time, 2-29
Command shell, I-4
auto-add, 4-20 Default
Command-line interface, 1-3
list, 4-37, 4-60 administrator password, E-4
Common name, 2-47
search, 4-32, 4-59 branding file, 2-58
Component download cache, I-3
view, 4-19, 4-36 caller ID, 4-7
Conferences
dictionary, 2-58
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

Index
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
digital certificate, 2-41 Display name, 4-35, 4-57 configuration, 3-18

filtering, 4-36 Distributed conferences, 5-13 configure, 3-11
gateway, 2-7 DNIS domain, 2-47
organization, 4-4 Dialed Number Identification invitation, 2-51, 4-10, 4-36,
Service, 4-45 4-61
prompt set, 2-33
DNS type, 4-61
status, 4-60 name server, 2-7
Delegates, 4-48 Email
resolvable address, 4-62 invitation formats, 4-19
Delete users, 4-71
server, 2-76, 2-80 E-mail invitation
Department code, 4-15, 4-31, formats, 4-36
Document Type Definition
4-41, 4-42, 4-43, 4-44, 4-57,
(DTD), 4-69 Encryption, 2-23
6-3, 6-9
Domain rules, 4-52 Enhanced Collaboration Service
Desktop sharing, 4-58
Domains (ECS), 2-114
Destination access codes, 2-63
directory, 2-70 Ethernet
adding organizations, 4-4 backplane, 2-86
host name, 2-70
associating with interface name swap, 3-5, 3-6
net, 2-110 organizations, 4-7 switch, 2-87
number plan, 2-11
component, 2-47 Executive user, 4-58
number types, 2-11
creating, 2-39 Expanding Instant Messaging
DHCP, 2-6, 3-9, 3-11, 3-24 deleting, 2-41 window, 4-60
Dial-in numbers, 4-10, 4-44
name, 2-7, 2-39, 2-40, F-2 Export user data, 4-69
Dialing
phone numbers, 2-63 Extension
bad attempt, 4-9
settings, 2-40 dialing, 2-88
by name, 4-44
Domestic toll calls, 2-22 patterns, 2-89
during a conference, 4-58 External trunk clock, 2-10
Drop leg, 5-4, 5-6
extension, 2-88
DS0 (Digital Signal, Level 0), ...........................................................................
into a conference, 4-58
2-113
out, 4-31 F Failover
DTMF, 2-13 stack, 2-81
DIFF-SERV field, 2-13
Dynamic stacking, 2-76 timeout, 2-31, 2-33
Digit string, 2-88
........................................................................... Federation, 2-72, 2-74
Digital keys, 2-43
File
password protected, 2-43 E ECS
agent, 2-116 attachment, 4-31
Direct Inward Dialing (DID),
host IP address, 2-117 system, 6-12
4-45
Disk service, 2-116 Filter
quota, 4-8, 4-31, 4-57 pattern, 2-89, 2-90
user, 2-114
space, 4-57 viewing, 4-60
EDCUninstall.bat, I-4
Filtering
usage, 2-51, 4-27, 4-31, 5-9, EDCViewerUninstall.bat, I-4 contacts, 4-60
6-12
E-mail
default, 4-36
Disk quota, 4-15 address, 4-55
Firewalls, 1-3
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

Index
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
First-in-first-out (FIFO), 4-10 call, 4-44 LDAP

FQDN data, 5-17 administrator ID, 2-47
Fully Qualified Domain Instant Messaging administrator password, 2-47
Name, 2-40 pop-up, 4-36 Microsoft Active Directory,
FQDN (fully qualified domain presence, 4-36 2-45
name), F-2 queries, 2-44, 4-3
sending, 4-60
Framing, 2-11 query, 2-44
transcripts, G-1
FTP, 2-69 schema, 2-47
Interactive Voice Response, 3-29
Fully qualified domain name server name, 2-47
(FQDN), 2-73, 2-76 Interface
bonding, 2-101 UID, 2-47
.............................................................................
combined, 2-101 user ID, 2-47
G G.726-32 codec, 2-13 command-line, 1-3 Leader
Gateway routing information, 2-8 access code, 4-46, 4-56, 6-8
card, 4-45 components, I-5
Internal
default, 2-7 database, 2-44 participant access code pair,
General alarms, 2-22 oscillator, 2-11 4-68
General alerts, 2-22 trunk interface clock, 2-10 requirement, 6-8
Global Catalog video client, 4-38 Legs

Active Directory, 2-46 adhoc, 4-46
International
Global parameters, 2-10 dialing, 2-91 attributes, 4-46
Grep command, 2-91 prefixes, 4-51 call IDs, 4-45
Invitations drop, 5-4, 5-6

.............................................................................
calendar, 4-12 duration, 4-44
H H323
Email, 4-12 leaders, 4-46
IP addresses, 4-38
IP addresses, 2-6, 2-7, 2-86 participants, 4-46
History log, 6-10
static, 2-6 playing back, 4-46
Host
IP trunking interface, 3-26 recording, 4-46
ID, 2-110
ISDN start, 4-44
name, 2-7, 2-32
telephone number, 4-38
HTML errors, 2-91 types, 4-45
ISO file, 3-27
HTTPS, 2-23 unique numbers, 4-44
IVR access code length, 2-24
HTTPS (SSL) session, 2-41 License
............................................................................. AMDS, 2-67
.............................................................................
K Kernel, 5-11 certificate, 2-64, 2-68
I IBM Lotus Sametime, 2-51, 4-12 uploading, 3-9, 3-24
.............................................................................
IEEE phone number, 2-89 Licensing mode, 2-68
IM (Instant Message) archiving, L Languages
Line buildout loss, 2-11
2-102, G-1 available, 2-58
Line coding, 2-11
IM session sounds, 4-60 user interface, 4-57
Linux, 2-91
Incoming LCS SIP URI, 4-29, 4-59
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

Index
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................
Live Communication Server SIP Microsoft Office Communicator,
URI, 4-59 4-59 O OEM partners, 1-3
Load sharing strategy, 2-11 allowing conferences, 4-32
Offline contact, 4-60
Lock video client, 4-59 conferencing license, 2-67
One-time conference call, 4-30
Lock video mcu, 4-59 user, 4-59
Open source software, 2-69
Mobile gateway, 4-32, 4-59
Log files Operator, 4-32, 4-59
generating, 2-23 Monitoring, 5-2 assistance, 4-9, 4-33
retrieving, 2-23 Monophonic mu-law, 2-33 conference, 4-59
Logging, I-2 Multiple conference ID, 4-33
leaders, 4-31, 4-58, 6-9
Login console, 4-33
ID, 4-21 user accounts, 4-54
queue, 4-10, 4-33
password, 4-58 Multipoint conferences, 3-29
Organization
timeout, 2-23 Multi-server maximum number of ports,
configuration, 4-45 4-8
.............................................................................
site, 4-76 restricted users, 4-8
M MAC address, 2-101
Music on hold, 2-63, 4-8 Organizations, 2-49, 4-3
Manage phone numbers, 4-29 list, 4-5
Mutually Authenticated
Manual Transport Layer Security names, 4-7, 6-13
server restore, 3-5 (TLS), 2-43
organization administrator,
uninstall, I-3 My Teamwork, 4-34 4-30, 4-73
Maximum phone numbers, 2-63, 4-8
...........................................................................
application sharing legs, 4-9
provisioning, 4-4
audio legs, 4-8 N National dialing prefixes, 2-22
settings, 2-51
IICS sessions, 2-24 Net mask, 2-7, 2-110
Organiztion administrator, 4-30
shared applications, 2-26 Networks, 3-17
architecture, 1-3 Oscillator, 2-11
MCU
boundary, 4-39 Outbound
IP address, 2-16
alternate proxy, 2-31
port, 2-16 ID, 2-110
channels, 2-11
MCU settings interface, 5-19
DS0, 2-11
lock, 4-15 termination, 2-11
proxy, 2-31
MD5 authentication, 2-96, H-2 NIST Internet Time Service
(ITS), D-1 Outgoing
Media port management, 2-29
call, 4-44
Media server, 2-86 NNI (network side) interfaces,
2-11 data, 5-17
quiesce, 5-5
Message pop-up window, 5-9 Node ID, 2-62, 2-76, 4-44, 4-47 ...........................................................................
MIB, H-3 notes.ini file, 4-14

P Package type, 6-11
MIB files, 2-97 NTLM authentication, 4-63
Paging devices, 4-22
Microphone, 4-38 NTP server, 2-7, D-1 Parameters
Microsoft license, 2-69 format, 4-57
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

Index
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
global, 2-10 AMDS, 4-33 deleting, 2-33

name value pairs, 4-57 application sharing, 2-26 Proxy, 4-62
Participants audio, 2-26 Proxy traversal, I-2
access codes, 4-46, 6-8 authentication, 2-49 PSTN
active, 5-3 capacities, 2-64 gateway cards, 2-76
anonymous, 2-24 limits, 4-8 interfaces, 1-1
participant/leader access code management, 2-25 networks, 2-10, 2-11
pairs, 4-68 stacks, 2-76
per organization, 2-27
Password sub-systems, 2-12
ACS system, 4-29 PSTN usage, 6-5
reserved, 4-58, 6-9 trunk logs, 5-21
changing, 4-29, E-3
voice, 4-57 trunk settings, 2-8
login, 4-58
VoIP, 2-26 trunks, 2-8, 2-86, 2-111, 5-13
policy, 2-51, 4-49
Pre-configured custom rules, 2-89
requirements, 4-49
.............................................................................
Presence, 4-59 QMCDU, 4-30

SIP server, 2-32 Q
status, 4-60
Payload preference order, 2-12 Quota (MB), 6-13
Presence monitored, 4-29
PBX .............................................................................
extension, 2-91, 4-46 PRI signaling, 4-45
Primary R Radio equipment, 4-22
vendor, 2-11
servers Radvision
PCM Companding, 2-10 conference types, 2-16
queue, 3-14
Peer to peer video, 2-16 MCU, 2-17
Primary servers, 2-7, 5-15
PEM (Privacy-Enhanced Mail), application server, 2-86 service list, 2-16
2-43
Private network, 2-73 RAID configuration, 5-11
Perl, 2-90, 2-91
Project Realm, 2-32, 4-62
Phone formatting rules, 2-88 code, 6-9 domain name, 2-30
Phone label, 4-11 Project code, 4-15, 4-31, 4-41, Recording
Phone numbers 4-43, 4-45, 4-57, 6-3 enabled, 4-58
managing, 4-29 Prompt requirements, 4-15
toll free, 2-51 set names, 2-36
Recordings
Phones, 2-51 Prompt sets, 2-33, 4-7 names, 4-44
number display filters, 2-90 adding, 2-36
scheduled, 4-40
presence, 2-114 changing, 2-36 Records
states, 4-36 deleting, 2-38 TCP/IP information, 2-6
Playback, 4-44, 4-46 managing, 2-34 Red Hat Enterprise 4.0, 3-26
Pop-up window, 4-36 Provisioning RedHat Enterprise 4.0
Port 443 auto, 2-44, 2-47 license, 2-65
retrieving log files, 2-23 setting up users, 4-3 Redundancy pair, 2-81
Ports Proxies Registered
allocation, 2-25 adding, 2-33 password, 4-62
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

Index
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
phone, 4-29 Restricting Sequential, 2-11

telephone number, 4-55, 4-56 users, 4-8 Serial administration console,
user, 5-13 Retry count, 2-113 3-24
user name, 4-62 RFC2833 payload type, 2-13 Serial console, 2-6, E-1
Registrar, 4-62 Round robin, 2-11 Serial port console, E-3
Regular expressions, 2-88, 2-89 Route management, 2-110 Server IP Address

Router, 2-110 default port number, 2-32
Remote servers
list, 2-74 Routing table Servers
information, 5-19 alarm and event, 2-98
Remote sites, 2-72, 2-73, 2-77
node numbers, 2-72 network addresses, 2-110 Alliance, 3-5
Replication, 2-86, 3-13, 3-15 RTP, 2-8 alternate IP, 2-32

enabling, 3-19 device, 2-16 application, 2-77
Report settings, 2-12 checking secondary
format, 6-3 configuration, 3-20
...........................................................................
histogram, 6-5 default IP address, 2-32
S Sametime, 4-59
Reports document conversion, 3-30
maximum length of
CSV, 4-43 federating, 2-75
conferences, 4-14
Web, 4-43 installing primary, 3-8
Sample LDAP configuration
XML, 4-43 option, 2-46 Intel-based rack-mountable,
Requiring password change, 4-58 Scheduled conferences 1-3
Reservationless call owners, 4-44 IP addresses, 2-32, 2-40
access codes, 4-56 default caller ID, 4-7 manual backup, 3-2
calls, 4-44 list, 4-39 manual restoring, 3-5
code sets, 4-72 viewing, 6-7 manually restoring, 3-10
conferences, 2-29, 4-7, 4-8, SCP, 2-69 media, 2-77, 5-14
4-30, 4-31, 4-47, 4-57
Scratch installing, 3-15 name, 2-47
length of conferences, 4-57
Sealed appliance, 1-3 names, 2-40
setting, 4-57
Secondary primary, 2-86, 3-8, 3-10,
Reservationless calls application server, 2-86 3-20
maximum length, 4-31
queue list, 3-21 restoring, 3-5, 3-8
options, 4-30
Secondary servers restoring Alliance servers,
Reserved ports, 4-58, 6-9 disabling replication, 3-8 3-5
Resetting web administrator live synchronized backup, restoring configuration, E-3
passwords, E-4 5-15
secondary, 2-86
Restarting server, 3-26, E-4 restoring configuration
software, E-3
Restarting server software settings, 3-14, 3-16
stacks, 2-81
processes, 3-28 Security certificate, E-3
standalone, 3-21
Restoring configuration settings, Self-signed SSL certificates, 2-43
3-9, 3-11 status, 5-17
Sending Instant Messages, 4-60
synchronization, 2-84
Sending mail, 2-100
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

Index
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
UC alarm and alert, 2-98 engine ID, 2-96, H-2 Standalone servers, 3-21
VoIP, 2-8 monitoring, 2-96 Static routes, 2-111
Service URI, 2-116 password, 2-96 Status indicators
Session Initiation Protocol (SIP), passwords, 2-96, 2-97, H-2 text, 5-18
1-2 privacy passwords, 2-97 Subnets
Shutting down server, 3-26, E-4 addresses, 2-100
security names, 2-96, H-2
Single leg timeout, 4-9 net masks, 2-110
settings, 2-95
SIP Subtree level, 2-47
system monitoring, 2-96
call ID, G-4 Sun Microsystems iPlanet
trap hosts, 2-96 Directory Server, 2-45
communicating via TCP, 2-33
traps, 2-96, 2-98, H-1
invites, 2-31 System
users, 2-96 alerts logs, 6-9
IP trunking interface, 3-26
v2, 2-96, H-1 backing up, 3-4
logs, 5-20
v3, 2-96, H-2 commands, 5-19
messages, 3-29
v3 security names, H-2 information, 5-11
NAT devices, 2-32
Source number types, 2-11 options, 2-21, 2-29
phones, 2-90
Spillover, 2-74 serial numbers, 2-64
proxies, 2-30, 4-39, 4-62
Spontaneous conferences, 2-29 status, 5-10
registrar, 4-39, 4-62
SSL, 2-49 System memory usage, 5-11
routing information, 2-8 certificates, 2-41, 2-42, 2-80
System-wide administrators,
settings, 2-12 encrypted browsers, 2-23 2-40, 2-52, 4-30, 4-73, 5-2
SSL sessions, 2-41 HTTPS, 2-23 .............................................................................
transports, 4-39, 4-63 LDAPS, 2-47
user names, 2-30, 2-32 T T1 service provider, 2-11
Stack
SIP registrar, 4-39 name, 5-14 T1/CAS, 2-11
T1/CCS, 2-11
Site connections, 5-13 Stacking
administration, F-2 Task Manager, I-3
Smart mail relay hosts, 2-23
backplane, 2-81, 2-86 TCP, 2-33, 4-39, 4-63
SMTP
emails, 2-98 data replication, 2-63 TCP/IP
configuring, 2-7
expired messages, G-2 dynamic, 2-75
settings, 2-5
IM archiving, G-2 geographically distributed,
message sequence numbers, 2-72 TDM Network Interface Module,
G-4 multi-server, 4-76 2-26, 2-72
message stamps, G-2 names, 2-76, 2-77 Technical note

cookies, 2-8
message structure, G-2 parameters, 2-73
Telephones
serial number, G-4 replacement of secondary network settings, 2-9, 2-10
SMTP service, G-1 server, 3-14
registered numbers, 4-21
SNMP server names, 2-80
Temporary system IDs, 4-44, 5-21
authorized passwords, 2-97 static, 2-76
Test rules, 4-54
community, 2-96 viewing conferences, 5-3
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

Index
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Third-party status, 5-13 looking up, 4-76

clients, 2-14 T1/CAS, 2-11 mobile gateway, 2-67
software, 1-3, 2-68 utilization, 6-4 names, 4-55, 4-62, E-3
Time, 2-29 utilization graph, 6-5 preferences, 2-51, 4-34
Time zones Trusted hosts restricting, 4-8
setting, 2-22, 2-29 modify, 2-114 settings, 2-51, 4-28
Timeout modify ECS host IP address,
single leg, 4-9 status, 4-35
2-117
updating settings, 4-56
uploaded documents, 4-9
...........................................................................
TLS, 4-39, 4-63 ...........................................................................
U UDP
Toll-free, 4-12 V V1/V2c, 2-96
proxies, 2-30
TOS (Type of Service) flags, 2-13 V3, 2-96
transport, 4-39, 4-63
TPDAS V3 w/Privacy, 2-96
UNI (user-side) interfaces, 2-11
interface, 2-111
Variable
Uninstall
rules, 2-111, 2-112 name, 2-117, I-7
automatic, I-3
Translation value, I-7
manual, I-3
language, 4-35
UNIX Variables
set files, 2-60 system, I-7
DAS rules, 2-91
sets, 2-59 Video
regular expressions, 2-91
tables, 2-58, 2-60 ActiveX, 4-38
Upgrading server software, 3-28
Translation language, 4-18 auto answer, 4-62
User
Translation set files client, 4-38
status, 4-18
downloading, 2-60 client settings, 4-59
User names
editing, 2-60 SIP, 2-32 enabled, 4-58
Translation sets Users enabling, 4-31
dictionaries, 2-59 accounts, 4-20, 4-21, 4-27 endpoint, 4-38, 4-58
Translation settings, 4-10 adding, 4-56 internal audio, 4-62
Transparent authentication authentication, 2-44 internal client, 4-62
proxies, I-2
authorizing names, 2-30 internal client and Windows
Trunk status, 5-2
changing settings, 4-56 Vista, 4-38
Trunks
confirming, 4-22 license, 2-67
E1, 2-11
deleting, 4-56 lock client settings, 4-59
interface clock, 2-10
description, 4-29 lock MCU settings, 4-59
interface clocks, 2-10
descriptions, 4-57 locking client settings, 4-31
IP, 2-72
executives, 4-58 locking MCU settings, 4-31
numbers, 4-45, 5-13, 6-5
IDs, 4-44 MCU settings, 2-14, 4-59
PRI, 2-11
inactivity, 2-23 parameters, 4-46
PSTN, 2-8, 2-72
listing, 4-25 server, 4-39
routing rules, 2-111
locating, 4-27
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

Index
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
settings, 2-14, 4-62 server administration emails,

users, 2-67 2-22
Video camera server name, 2-7

automatically turn on, 4-39 Web interface language, 4-7
Video client settings Windows HOOK, I-6
lock, 4-15
.............................................................................
Video configuration
automatic, 4-38 X XML
errors, 2-91
Viewer components, I-5
report, 4-43
Visual indicator, 2-24
XML file, 4-68
VLAN, 2-87
VMware .............................................................................
license, 2-68, 3-11, 3-18
Z ZIP file, 2-35
Voice
mail, 2-112
port, 4-57
prompt formats, 2-33
prompts, 2-33, C-1
Voice interface
alarm emails, 2-22
alert emails, 2-22
Voice Interface Alert Email, 2-26
Voice prompts, C-1
VoIP
address, 4-44
RTP voice stream, 6-6
settings, 2-12
traffic, 6-6
utilization, 6-6
Voice over IP interface, 1-1
VoIP utilization
histogram, 6-6
.............................................................................
W Web
interface language, 2-41, 4-35
presentations, 2-23
reports, 4-43
server, 2-41
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

Index
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
November 20, 2008

Omni Touch

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Omni Touch

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OmniTouch

Advanced Communication Server (ACS)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

VMware® is a registered trademark of VMware, Inc.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Copyright © 2008 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.

FCC Interference Statement

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Remote sites .............................................................................................................................................. 2-72

4 Provisioning and Account Management

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Assigning text translations ........................................................................................................................4-10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

System information ................................................................................................................................... 5-11

A Error Codes and Alarm Conditions

E Serial Console Interface: Administrative Functions

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

I Application Sharing Proxy Issues

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-27 List Organizations Links .............................................................................................................. 2-51

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-60 Route Management ...................................................................................................................2-110

4 Provisioning and Account Management

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-4 Edit Organization Screen .............................................................................................................. 4-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-37 Changing an Administrator’s Password .......................................................................................4-75

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

6-12 Install History Selection .............................................................................................................. 6-11

E Serial Console Interface: Administrative Functions

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4-4 Default User Settings ................................................................................................................... 4-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Alcatel-Lucent’s OmniTouch Advanced Communications Server (ACS) 1-1

Using this guide 1-3

Alcatel-Lucent’s OmniTouch Advanced Communications

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

• Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch My Teamwork for IBM® Lotus® Sametime®

Figure 1-1 Applications on the OmniTouch ACS Platform

In addition, OmniTouch ACS applications are extensible. Alcatel-Lucent exposes the

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

customized and branded zero-footprint conferencing, telephony, and collaboration

Using this guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

This Guide offers no guidance on managing the OmniTouch ACS’s operating

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Initiating configuration 2-5

TCP/IP settings 2-5

PSTN trunk settings 2-8

VoIP settings 2-12

Video settings 2-14

Selecting RADVISION 2-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

SSL certificates 2-41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

AMDS (Automated Message Delivery System) settings 2-112

To configure the TCP/IP information for OmniTouch ACS 2-7

To configure PSTN trunk settings 2-8

To configure video settings 2-14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine